SAP BODS Online Training

Course Duration : 30 Hrs

Learners : 1525

Reviews : 4.9

Get practical exposure in SAP Business Objects Data Services as per the industry standards with practical use-cases from the fundamentals to an advanced level by industry professionals at SAP BODS Online Training.

KITS Online Training Institute provides best SAP BODS Online Training by our highly professional certified trainers. SAP BODS is an ETL tool currently acquired by SAP. It is used for integration with all types of disparate systems, extracting data, transforming into meaningful information and loading into all types of systems. KITS also do corporate training’s and help them to train their employees. SAP BODS is a prominent ETL tool used to build Enterprise data warehouses and data mart. We also provide other related courses

Defining Data Services

Defining Source and Target Metadata

Defining Datastores in Data Services
Defining Data Services System Configurations
Defining a Data Services Flat File Format
Defining Datastore Excel File Formats

Creating Batch Jobs

Troubleshooting Batch Jobs

Setting Traces and Adding Annotations
Using the Interactive Debugger
Setting up and Using the Auditing Feature

Using Functions, Scripts and Variables

Using Built-In Functions
Using Variables, Parameters and Scripts

Using Platform Transforms

Using Platform Transforms
Using the Map Operation Transform
Using the Validation Transform
Using the Merge Transform
Using the Case Transform
Using the SQL Transform

Setting Up Error Handling

Capturing Changes in Data

Capturing Changes in Data
Using Source-Based Change Data Capture (CDC)
Using Target-Based Change Data Capture (CDC)

Using Text Data Processing

Using the Entity Extraction Transform

Using Data Services (Integrator) Platform Transforms

Using Data Services (Integrator) Platform Transforms
Using the Pivot Transform
Using the Data Transfer Transform and Performance Optimization

Self-Paced

Learn when and where it's convenient for you.Utilise the course's practical exposure through high-quality videos.Real-Time Instructors Will Guide You Through The Course From Basic to Advanced Levels

Online

Receive A Live Demonstration Of Each Subject From Our Skilled Faculty Obtain LMS Access Following Course Completion Acquire Materials for Certification

Corporate

The Class Mode Of Training, Or Attend An Online Training Lecture At Your Facility From A Subject Matter Expert With discussions, exercises, and real-world use cases, learn for a full day.Create Your Curriculum Using the Project Requirements

What is the Qualification of the trainer?

The trainer is a real-time expert and has a significant amount of technology

What if I miss the class?

Irrespective of your class attendance, every session will be recorded. Soon after the completion of the class, you can able to access the videos

Who provides the environment to execute the practical?

During the course, the trainer will provide the environment to execute the practical's.

Do we offer any discounts on the course?

Once you contact us, our support team will offer you great discounts.

Do we accept the fee in installments?

Yes! we do accept the fee in installments, depending on the mode of training you take.

What are the different modes that KITS offer?

We offer the best training on different modes like self-paced, one-one, batch as well as corporate training.

Do KITS offer any placement assistance?

Yes! Our support team will take your resumes and forward to the firms for placement assistance

Will KITS help you in getting Certified?

During the course, the trainer will provide the probable certification question to make you certified.

Click here to Login to add a review.

100% Online Course

Flexible Schedule

Beginner Level To Advance Level

Real-Time Scenarios With Projects

LMS Access

Interview Questions & Resume Guidelines Access

SAP ABAP Interview Questions

Q.What is an ABAP data dictionary? Ans: ABAP 4 data dictionary describes the logical structures of the objects used in application development and shows how they are mapped to the underlying relational database in tables/views. Q.What are domains and data element? Ans: Domains:Domain is the central object for describing the technical characteristics of an attribute of an business objects. It describes the value range of the field. Data Element: It is used to describe the semantic definition of the table fields like description the field. Data element describes how a field can be displayed to end-user. Q.What is foreign key relationship? Ans: A relationship which can be defined between tables and must be explicitly defined at field level. Foreign keys are used to ensure the consistency of data. Data entered should be checked against existing data to ensure that there are now contradiction. While defining foreign key relationship cardinality has to be specified. Cardinality mentions how many dependent records or how referenced records are possible. Q.Describe data classes? Ans: Master data: It is the data which is seldomly changed. Transaction data: It is the data which is often changed. Organization data: It is a customizing data which is entered in the system when the system is configured and is then rarely changed. System data:It is the data which R/3 system needs for itself. Q.What are indexes? Ans: Indexes are described as a copy of a database table reduced to specific fields. This data exists in sorted form. This sorting form ease fast access to the field of the tables. In order that other fields are also read, a pointer to the associated record of the actual table are included in the index. Yhe indexes are activated along with the table and are created automatically with it in the database. Q.Difference between transparent tables and pooled tables? Ans: Transparent tables: Transparent tables in the dictionary has a one-to-one relation with the table in database. Its structure corresponds to single database field. Table in the database has the same name as in the dictionary. Transparent table holds application data. Pooled tables. Pooled tables in the dictionary has a many-to-one relation with the table in database. Table in the database has the different name as in the dictionary. Pooled table are stored in table pool at the database level. Q.What is an ABAP/4 Query? Ans: ABAP/4 Query is a powerful tool to generate simple reports without any coding. ABAP/4 Query can generate the following 3 simple reports: Basic List: It is the simple reports. Statistics: Reports with statistical functions like Average, Percentages. Ranked Lists: For analytical reports. - For creating a ABAP/4 Query, programmer has to create user group and a functional group. Functional group can be created using with or without logical database table. Finally, assign user group to functional group. Finally, create a query on the functional group generated. Q.What is BDC programming? Ans: Transferring of large/external/legacy data into SAP system using Batch Input programming. Batch input is a automatic procedure referred to as BDC(Batch Data Communications).The central component of the transfer is a queue file which receives the data vie a batch input programs and groups associated data into “sessions”. Q.What are the functional modules used in sequence in BDC? Ans: These are the 3 functional modules which are used in a sequence to perform a data transfer successfully using BDC programming: BDC_OPEN_GROUP - Parameters like Name of the client, sessions and user name are specified in this functional modules. BDC_INSERT - It is used to insert the data for one transaction into a session. BDC_CLOSE_GROUP - This is used to close the batch input session. Q.What are internal tables? Ans: Internal tables are a standard data type object which exists only during the runtime of the program. They are used to perform table calculations on subsets of database tables and for re-organising the contents of database tables according to users need. Q.What is ITS? What are the merits of ITS? Ans: ITS is a Internet Transaction Server. ITS forms an interface between HTTP server and R/3 system, which converts screen provided data by the R/3 system into HTML documents and vice-versa. Merits of ITS: A complete web transaction can be developed and tested in R/3 system. All transaction components, including those used by the ITS outside the R/3 system at runtime, can be stored in the R/3 system. The advantage of automatic language processing in the R/3 system can be utilized to language-dependent HTML documents at runtime. Q.What is DynPro? Ans: DynPro is a Dynamic Programming which is a combination of screen and the associated flow logic Screen is also called as DynPro. Q.What are screen painter and menu painter? Ans: Screen painter: Screen painter is a tool to design and maintain screen and its elements. It allows user to create GUI screens for the transactions. Attributes, layout, filed attributes and flow logic are the elements of Screen painter. Menu painter: Menu painter is a tool to design the interface components. Status, menu bars, menu lists, F-key settings, functions and titles are the components of Menu painters. Screen painter and menu painter both are the graphical interface of an ABAP/4 applications. Q.What are the components of SAP scripts? Ans: SAP scripts is a word processing tool of SAP which has the following components: Standard text. It is like a standard normal documents. Layout sets. - Layout set consists of the following components: Windows and pages, Paragraph formats, Character formats. Creating forms in the R/3 system. Every layout set consists of Header, paragraph, and character string. ABAP/4 program. Q.What is ALV programming in ABAP? When is this grid used in ABAP?- Ans: ALV is Application List viewer. Sap provides a set of ALV (ABAP LIST VIEWER) function modules which can be put into use to embellish the output of a report. This set of ALV functions is used to enhance the readability and functionality of any report output. Cases arise in sap when the output of a report contains columns extending more than 255 characters in length. In such cases, this set of ALV functions can help choose selected columns and arrange the different columns from a report output and also save different variants for report display. This is a very efficient tool for dynamically sorting and arranging the columns from a report output. The report output can contain up to 90 columns in the display with the wide array of display options. Q.What are the events in ABAP/4 language? Ans: Initialization, At selection-screen, Start-of-selection, end-of-selection, top-of-page, end-of-page, At line-selection, At user-command, At PF, Get, At New, At LAST, AT END, AT FIRST. Q.What is CTS and what do you know about it? Ans: The Change and Transport System (CTS) is a tool that helps you to organize development projects in the ABAP Workbench and in Customizing, and then transport the changes between the SAP Systems and clients in your system landscape. This documentation provides you with an overview of how to manage changes with the CTS and essential information on setting up your system and client landscape and deciding on a transport strategy. Read and follow this documentation when planning your development project. Q.What are logical databases? What are the advantages/ dis-advantages of logical databases? Ans: To read data from a database tables we use logical database. A logical database provides read-only access to a group of related tables to an ABAP/4 program. Advantages: i)check functions which check that user input is complete, correct,and plausible. ii)Meaningful data selection. iii)central authorization checks for database accesses. iv)good read access performance while retaining the hierarchical data view determined by the application logic. dis advantages: i)If you donot specify a logical database in the program attributes,the GET events never occur. ii)There is no ENDGET command,so the code block associated with an event ends with the next event statement (such as another GET or an END-OF-SELECTION). Q.What is a batch input session? Ans: BATCH INPUT SESSION is an intermediate step between internal table and database table. Data along with the action is stored in session ie data for screen fields, to which screen it is passed, program name behind it, and how next screen is processed. Q.How to upload data using CATT ? Ans: These are the steps to be followed to Upload data through CATT: Creation of the CATT test case & recording the sample data input. Download of the source file template. Modification of the source file. Upload of the data from the source file. Q.What is Smart Forms? Ans: Smart Forms allows you to create forms using a graphical design tool with robust functionality, color, and more. Additionally, all new forms developed at SAP will be created with the new Smart Form solution. Q.How can I make a differentiation between dependent and independent data? Ans: Client dependent or independent transfer requirements include client specific or cross client objects in the change requests. Workbench objects like SAPscripts are client specific, some entries in customizing are client independent. If you display the object list for one change request, and then for each object the object attributes, you will find the flag client specific. If one object in the task list has this flag on, then that transport will be client dependent. Q.What is the difference between macro and subroutine? Ans: Macros can only be used in the program the are defined in and only after the definition are expanded at compilation / generation. Subroutines (FORM) can be called from both the program the are defined in and other programs . A MACRO is more or less an abbreviation for some lines of code that are used more than once or twice. A FORM is a local subroutine (which can be called external). A FUNCTION is (more or less) a subroutine that is called external. Since debugging a MACRO is not really possible, prevent the use of them (I’ve never used them, but seen them in action). If the subroutine is used only local (called internal) use a FORM. If the subroutine is called external (used by more than one program) use a FUNCTION. Q.How we format the data before before write statement in report ? Ans: We can format the reports output by using the loop events like: 1.at first 2.at new 3.at last etc check docu Q.What is the difference between Table and Template? Ans: table is a dynamic and template is a static Q.When do we use End-of-selection? Ans: End-of-selection event are mostly used is when we are writing HR-ABAP code. In the HR-ABAP code, data is retrived in the Start-of-selection event and Printing on the list and all will be done in End-of-selection event. Q.In events start-of-selection is default event. When we have to use this event explicitly? Why? Ans: The default event in the ABAP is Start-of-selection.We have to call explicitely this event when you are writing other than ths event? , that is when you write AT? SELECTION-SCREEN EVENTS OR INITIALIZATION EVENT etc,you have to explicitely mention the Start-of-selection event while you are writing the logic. Before these events called ,all the code you have written come into this default Start-of-selection screen event. Q.What is the differences between ABAP and OOABAP. In which situation we use OOABAP? Ans: OOABAP is used to develop BSP/PCUI applications and also anthing involved object oriented like BADIs, SmartForms..etc.where as ABAP is used to develop traditional programs in R/3. Q.What is table buffer? Which type of tables used this buffer? Ans: buffer is nothing but a memory area. table is buffered means that table information is available on application server. when you call data from database table it will come from application server. transperent and pooled tables are buffered. cluster tables can not buffered. Q.What is the use of pretty printer ? Ans: Exactly where can we link the functional module to abap coding. Pretty Printer is used to format the ABAP Code we write in ABAP Editor ,like KEY WORDS in Capitals and remaining are in small letters which is also depend on system settings. We can call the function module in the ABAP Code .Press the Pattern button on Appl. tool bar then u will get box where u write the function module NAME which u want to call in the code by selecting the radio button CALL FUNCTION. In this way we link function module to ABAP Code. Q.What is the difference between SAP memory and ABAP memory? Answer1: data sending between main sessions using get parameter and set parameter is sap memory data sending between internal sessions using import or export parameters is abap memory Answer2: sap memory is a global memory whereas abap memory is local memory. For example, we have four programs in abap memory and assigned some varibles to a particular program in abap memory then those varibles can't be used by anyother program in abap memory i.e., the variables are only for that program and also local to that memory,whereas sap memory can access all the abap memory or else it can perform any kind of modifications. Answer3: SAP memory is available to the user during the entire terminal session. ABAP memory is available to the user during? life time? of? external session. Q.What is the difference between Type and Like? Answer1: TYPE, you assign datatype directly to the data object while declaring. LIKE,you assign the datatype of another object to the declaring data object. The datatype is referenced indirectly. Answer2: Type is a keyword used to refer to a data type whereas Like is a keyword used to copy the existing properties of already existing data object. Answer3: type refers the existing data type like refers the existing data object Q.What is Tcode SE16. For what is it used. Explain briefly? Answer1: SE16 is a T-code for object browser. Generally used to search the fields of SAP Tables . and respective data. Answer2: se16 is a data browse and it is used to view the contents of the table and we cannot change or append new fields to the existing structure of the table as we cannot view the structure level display using the se16 Q.What are different ABAP/4 editors? What are the differences? Ans: The 2 editors are se38 and se80 both have the abap editor in place. In se38 you can go create programs and view online reports and basically do all thedevelopmet of objects in this editor. In se80 ( object navigator) there are additional features such as creating packages,module pool , function group ,classes, programs ( where you can create ur programs) and BSP applications . Q.What is difference between dialog program and a report? Ans: Report is a excecutable program Dialog is a module pool program.It has to be executed via a transaction only. Dialog programming is used for customization ofscreens Q.How do you connect to the remote server if you are working from the office for the client in remote place. WAS web application server or ITS are generally used for this purpose. If you are sitting at your office with a server which is in the system and the other server is at the clients place you can generate IDOC, intermidiate documents which carry the data you want to transfer or the documents you want to transfer, these IDOC are interpretted by the system at the recieving end with the message class with which it is bound with. If you want to logon a system which is very distant..then remote login can be used this depends on the internet speed. Q.Explain about roll area , Dispatcher, ABAP-Processor. Answer1: Roll area is nothing but memory allocated by work process. It holds the information needed by R/3 about programs execution such as value of the variables. Dispatcher :All the requests that come from presentation server will be directed first to dispatcher. Further dispatcher sends this requests to work process on FIFO(First In and First Out) basis. Answer2: Dispatcher recieves the request from client and assigns the request to one of the work process. Roll area: Each workprocess works in a particular memory that memory is known as Role Area, which consists of User context and session data. ABAP- Processor :is an interpretor which can execute logic Q.Which one is not an exit comand ? (Exit, cencle, stop, back) Ans: STOP. Effect :The statement STOP is only to be used in executable programs EXIT. Effect :If the EXIT statement is executed outside of a loop, it will immediately terminate the current processing block. BACK. Effect : This statement positions the list cursor on the first position of the first line in a logical unit. So "Cancle" is not an exit command Q.What is Field symbol ? Answer1: You can use field symbols to make the program more dynamic. In this example the name of a table control is substituted by a field symbol. Thus you cal call the form with any internal table, using the name of the table control as a parameter. Example form insert_row using p_tc_name. field-symbols type cxtab_control. "Table control assign (p_tc_name) to . * insert 100 lines in table control -lines = 100. Answer2: fieldsymbol has the same concept as pointer in c, fieldsymbol don't point to a data type like char, num instead of that it points to the memory block. the syntax for fieldsymbol is FIELD-SYMBOL . EG. FOR FIELD SYMBOL. DATA: DAT LIKE SY-DATUM, TIM LIKE SY-UZEIT, CHAR(3) TYPE C VALUE 'ADF'. FIELD-SYMBOL : . MOVE DAT TO . WRITE:/ . MOVE TIM TO . WRITE:/ . MOVE CHAR TO . WRITE:/ . The output will be Today's date current time Q.What is lock object ? Ans: LockObjects used to synchornize access of several users using same data. Q.Why BAPI need then BDC ? Ans: BAPI"S provide the standard interface to other applications apart from SAP and within differnt vesions of SAP too. Also it is OOD bases so dosen"t depends on screen flow. BDC gets failed if we make changes for screen changes through IMG customization Q.What are the advantages and disadvantages of using views in ABAP programming ? Ans: advantages: view is used to retrieve the data very fastly from the database tables *memory wastage is reduced *faster than joins to retrieve the data from database tables disadvantages: view is not a container,it will not hold the data *view memory is not permanent memory Q.How data is stored in cluster table? Ans: A cluster table conatins data from mulitple DDIC tables. It stores data as a name value pair ( varkey, vardata) Q.Have you used performance tuning? What major steps will you use for these? Ans: First of all tunning can be done In three ways: disk i/o ,sql tunning , memory tunning, Before tunning u have to get the status of your database using Oracle utility called statpack , tkprof, then you should go for tunning Q.How to create client independent tables? Ans: client independent tables: the table in which the first field is not mandt is the client independent tables *mandt is the field with mandt as the data element *automatically client which we login is populated to mandt Q.What type of user exits have you written? Ans: There are four types 1.function exit 2.menu ixit 3.screen exit. 4.field exit. these are the user exits Q.What is a View ? Ans: A view is a logical grouping of one or more tables. A view on one or more tables i.e, the data from a view is not actually physically stored instead being derived from one or more tables. A view can be used to summarize data which is distributed among several tables How Many Types are there? Database View (SE11) Database views are implement an inner join, that is, only records of the primary table (selected via the join operation) for which the corresponding records of the secondary tables also exist are fetched. Inconsistencies between primary and secondary table could, therefore, lead to a reduced selection set. In database views, the join conditions can be formulated using equality relationships between any base fields. In the other types of view, they must be taken from existing foreign keys. That is, tables can only be collected in a maintenance or help view if they are linked to one another via foreign keys. Help View ( SE54) Help views are used to output additional information when the online help system is called. When the F4 button is pressed for a screen field, a check is first made on whether a matchcode is defined for this field. If this is not the case, the help view is displayed in which the check table of the field is the primary table. Thus, for each table no more than one help view can be created, that is, a table can only be primary table in at most one help view. Projection View Projection views are used to suppress or mask certain fields in a table (projection), thus minimizing the number of interfaces. This means that only the data that is actually required is exchanged when the database is accessed. A projection view can draw upon only one table. Selection conditions cannot be specified for projection views. Maintenance View ( SE54 ) Maintenance views enable a business-oriented approach to looking at data, while at the same time, making it possible to maintain the data involved. Data from several tables can be summarized in a maintenance view and maintained collectively via this view. That is, the data is entered via the view and then distributed to the underlying tables by the system. Q.What is Locking ? Ans: When two users simultaneously attempt to access the same data record, this is synchronized by a lock mechanism. When dialog transactions are programmed, locks are set and released by calling certain function modules. These function modules are generated automatically from the definition of so-called lock objects in the ABAP/4 Dictionary. To synchronize the access to a table by setting and removing locks, a Lock object has to be defined in the ABAP/4 Dictionary. Activating the lock object automatically creates #function modules for setting and removing locks. These function modules must be included when programming interactive transactions. Lock Mechanism To set locks, a lock object must be defined in the ABAP/4 Dictionary. In this lock object, those tables in which data records are to be locked by calling a lock are determined. All tables included in a lock object must be connected to each other via foreign keys. The key fields of the tables in a lock object form the Lock arguments for the tables. The lock arguments are the basis for formulating the logical condition for identifying the records to be locked. When activating this lock object, two function modules with the names ENQUEUE_ and DEQUEUE_ are generated. Example : Problem: You wish to prevent a user from being able to change the name of a course or the name of the professor with responsibility for the course at a time when another user is editing the course description (which contains this information). Solution: The problem described above can be solved by defining a lock object E_UKURS. This is done by defining primary and secondary tables in the lock object. Table UKURS is check table of table UKRSB, so UKURS should be selected as primary table and UKRSB as secondary table of the lock object. The Lock argument in this case is the field combination FABNR, KRSNR, and SPRAS (i.e Primary Key Combination). The Lock mode Shared is to be selected here. This allows several users to access the data simultaneously in display mode. The lock mode in the generated function modules for setting (ENQUEUE_E_UKURS) and releasing (DEQUEUE_E_UKURS) locks is therefore set to shared as default, but can be overridden by calling the function modules. If the function module ENQUEUE_E_UKURS is called with FABNR = ‘1′ and KRSNR = ‘3′, the record for course 3 in faculty 1 is locked in table UKURS. Furthermore, all the course descriptions for this course are locked in table UKRSB since field SPRAS was not specified when the function module was called. In such cases, the lock is made generically for a field which is not defined. If the function module DEQUEUE_E_UKURS is now called with FABNR = ‘1′, KRSNR = ‘3′ and SPRAS = ‘D’, the German course description is unlocked. All other course descriptions remain locked. Q.What is database utility ? Database utility is the interface between the ABAP/4 Dictionary and the underlying the SAP system. The database utility is the interface between the ABAP/4 Dictionary and the relational database underlying the SAP system. You can call the database utility from the initial screen of the ABAP/4 Dictionary with Utilities ® Database utility. The database utility allows you to create, delete and convert objects from the ABAP/4 Dictionary in the database. MODULARIZATION What is Modularization and its benefits? If the program contains the same or similar blocks of statements or it is required to process the same function several times, we can avoid redundancy by using modularization techniques. By modularizing the ABAP/4 programs we make them easy to read and improve their structure. Modularized programs are also easier to maintain and to update. Q.What guarantees the integration of all application modules? Ans: The R/3 basis system guarantees the integration of all application modules. The R/3 basis s/w provides the run time environment for the R/3 applications ensures optimal integration, defines a stable architectural frame for system enhancements, and contains the administration tools for the entire system.One of the main tasks of the basis system is to guarantee the portability of the complete system. Q.What are the central interfaces of the R/3 system? Ans: Presentation Interface. Database Interface. Operating system Interface. Q.Which interface controls what is shown on the p.c.? Ans: Presentation Interface. Q.Which interface converts SQL requirements in the SAP development system to those of the database? Ans: Database Interface. Q.What is SAP dispatcher? Ans: SAP dispatcher is the control agent that manages the resources for the R/3 applications. Q.What are the functions of dispatcher? Ans: Equal distribution of transaction load to the work processes. Management of buffer areas in main memory. Integration of the presentation levels. Organization of communication activities. Q.What is a work process? Ans: A work process is where individual dialog steps are actually processed and the work is done. Each work process handles one type of request. Q.Name various work processes of R/3 system? Ans: Dialog or Online (processes only one request at a time). Background (Started at a specific time) Update (primary or secondary) Enque (Lock mechanism). Spool (generated online or during back ground processing for printing). SAP ABAP Interview Questions SAP ABAP Interview Questions and Answers Q.Explain about the two services that are used to deal with communication. Ans: Message Service: Used by the application servers to exchange short internal messages, all system communications. Gateway Service: Enables communication between R/3 and external applications using CPI-C protocol. Q.Which work process triggers database changes? Ans: Update work process. Q.Define service (within R/3)? Ans: A service is a process or group of processes that perform a specific system function and often provide an application-programming interface for other processes to call. Q.What are the roll and page areas? Ans: Roll and page areas are SAP R/3 buffers used to store user contexts (process requests). The SAP dispatcher assigns process requests to work processes as they are queued in the roll and page areas. Paging area holds data from the application programs. Roll area holds data from previous dialog steps and data that characterize the user. Q.What are the different layers in R/3 system? Ans: Presentation Layer. Application Layer. Database Layer. Q.What are the phases of background processing? Ans: Job Scheduling. Job Processing. Job Overview. Q.What components of the R/e system initiate the start of background jobs at the specified time? Ans: The batch scheduler initiates the start of background job. The dispatcher then sends this request to an available background work process for processing. Q.Define Instance. Ans: An instance is an administrative unit in which components of an R/3 systems providing one or more services are grouped together. The services offered by an instance are started and stopped at random. All components are parameterized using a joint instance profile. A central R/3 system consists of a single instance in which all-necessary SAP services are offered. Each instance uses separate buffer areas. Q.From hardware perspective, every information system can be divided into three task areas Presentation, Application Logic and Data Storage. Ans: The R/3 Basis software is highly suitable for use in multi-level client/server architectures. Q.What are R/3 Basis configurations? Ans: A central system with centrally installed presentation software. Two-level client/server system with rolled out presentation software. Two-level client/server system. Presentation and Application run on the same computer. Three-level client/server system. Presentation, Application and database each run on separate computers. Q.What is a Service in SAP terminology? Ans: A service refers to something offered by a s/w component. Q.What is Server in SAP terminology? Ans: A component can consist of one process or a group and is then called the server for the respective service. Q.What is a client in SAP terminology? Ans: A S/W component that uses the service (offered by a s/w component) is called a Client. At the same time these clients may also be servers for other services. Q.What is a SAP system? Ans: The union of all s/w components that are assigned to the same databases is called as a SAP system. Q.What is the means of communications between R/3 and external applications? Ans: The means of communication between R/2,R/3 and external applications is via the CPI-C handler or SAP Gateway, using the CPI-C Protocol. Q.What is the protocol used by SAP Gateway process? Ans: The SAP Gateway process communicates with the clients based on the TCP/IP Protocol. Q.Expand CPI-C. Ans: Common Program Interface Communication. Q.What is a Spool request? Ans: Spool requests are generated during dialog or background processing and placed in the spool database with information about the printer and print format. The actual data is places in the Tem Se (Temporary Sequential objects). Q.What are different types of Log records? Ans: V1 and V2. V1 must be processed before V2. But, we can have more than one V2 logs. Q.What are the types of Update requests? Ans: An update request can be divided into one primary (V1) and several Secondary update components (V2). Time-critical operations are placed in V1 component and those whose timing is less critical are placed in V2 components. If a V1 update fails, V2 components will not be processed. Q.Explain how SAP GUI handles output screen for the user. Ans: The SAP front-end s/w can either run on the same computer or on different computers provided for that purpose. User terminal input is accepted by the SAP terminal program SAP GUI, converted to SAP proprietary format and sent to the SAP dispatcher. The dispatcher coordinates the information exchange between the SAP GUIs and the work processes. The dispatcher first places the processing request in request queues, which it then processes. The dispatcher dispatches the requests one after another, to the available work process. The actual processing takes place in the work process. When processing is complete, the result of a work process is returned via the dispatcher to the SAP GUI. The SAP GUI interprets the received data and generates the output screen for the user. Q.What is full form of BDC Session? Ans: Batch Data Communication Session. Q.What are the steps in a BDC session? Ans: The first step in a BDC session is to identify the screens of the transaction that the program will process. Next step is to write a program to build the BDC table that will be used to submit the data to SAP. The final step is to submit the BDC table to the system in the batch mode or as a single transaction by the CALL TRANSACTION command. Q.How do you find the information on the current screen? Ans: The information on the current screen can be found by SYSTEM à STATUS command from any menu. Q.How do you save data in BDC tables? Ans: The data in BDC tables is saved by using the field name ‘BDC_OKCODE’ and field value of ‘/11’. Q.What is the last entry in all BDC tables? Ans: In all BDC tables the last entry is to save the data by using the field name BDC_OKCODE and a field value of ‘/11’. Q.What is a multiple line field? Ans: A multiple line field is a special kind of field which allows the user to enter multiple lines of data into it. Q.How do you populate data into a multiple line field? Ans: To populate data into a multiple line field, an index is added to the field name to indicate which line is to be populated by the BDC session (Line index). Q.What are control tables? Ans: The values specified for the size category and data class are mapped to database-specific values via control tables. Q.What is the function of the transport system and workbench organizer? Ans: The function of the transport system and the Workbench Organizer is to manage any changes made to objects of the ABAP/4 Development Workbench and to transport these changes between different SAP systems. Q.What is a table pool? Ans: A table pool (or pool) is used to combine several logical tables in the ABAP/4 Dictionary. The definition of a pool consists of at least two key fields and a long argument field (VARDATA). Q.What are pooled tables? Ans: These are logical tables, which must be assigned to a table pool when they are defined. Pooled tables can be used to store control data (such as screen sequences or program parameters). Q.What is a table cluster? Ans: A table cluster combines several logical tables in the ABAP/4 Dictionary. Several logical rows from different cluster tables are brought together in a single physical record. The records from the cluster tables assigned to a cluster are thus stored in a single common table in the database. Q.How can we access the correction and transport system? Ans: Each time you create a new object or change an existing object in the ABAP/4 Dictionary, you branch automatically to the Workbench Organizer or correction and transport system. Q.How is conversion of data types done between ABAP/4 & DB layer? Ans:Conversion between ABAP/4 data types and the database layer is done within the database interface. Q.How is conversion of data types done between ABAP/4 & external level? Ans: Conversion between the external layer and the ABAP/4 layer is done in the SAP dialog manager DYNP. Q.What is interactive reporting? Ans: It helps you to create easy-to-read lists. You can display an overview list first that contains general information and provide the user with the possibility of choosing detailed information that you display on further lists. Q.What are the uses of interactive reporting? Ans: The user can actively control data retrieval and display during the session. Instead of an extensive and detailed list, you create a basic list with condensed information from which the user can switch to detailed displays by positioning the cursor and entering commands. The detailed information appears in secondary lists. Q.What is secondary list? Ans: It allows you to enhance the information presented in the basic list. The user can, for example, select a line of the basic list for which he wants to see more detailed information. You display these details on a secondary list. Secondary lists may either overlay the basic list completely or you can display them in an extra window on the screen. The secondary lists can themselves be interactive again. Q.How to select valid lines for secondary list? Ans: To prevent the user from selecting invalid lines, ABAP/4 offers several possibilities. At the end of the processing block END-OF-SELECTION, delete the contents of one or more fields you previously stored for valid lines using the HIDE statement. At the event AT LINE-SELECTION, check whether the work area is initial or whether the HIDE statement stored field contents there. After processing the secondary list, clear the work area again. This prevents the user from trying to create further secondary lists from the secondary list displayed. Q.How to create user interfaces for lists? Ans: The R/3 system automatically, generates a graphical user interface (GUI) for your lists that offers the basic functions for list processing, such as saving or printing the list. If you want to include additional functionality, such as pushbuttons, you must define your own interface status. To create a new status, the Development Workbench offers the Menu Painter. With the Menu Painter, you can create menus and application toolbars. And you can assign Function Keys to certain functions. At the beginning of the statement block of AT END-OF-SELECTION, active the status of the basic list using the statement: SET PF-STATUS ‘STATUS’. Q.What is interactive reporting? Ans: A classical non-interactive report consists of one program that creates a single list. Instead of one extensive and detailed list, with interactive reporting you create basic list from which the user can call detailed information by positioning the cursor and entering commands. Interactive reporting thus reduces information retrieval to the data actually required. Q.Can we call reports and transactions from interactive reporting lists? Ans: Yes. It also allows you to call transactions or other reports from lists. These programs then use values displayed in the list as input values. The user can, for example, call a transaction from within a list of change the database table whose data is displayed in the list. Q.How to maintain lists? Ans: To return from a high list level to the next-lower level (SY-LSIND), the user chooses Back on a secondary list. The system then releases the currently displayed list and activates the list created one step earlier. The system deletes the contents of the released list. To explicitly specify the list level, into which you want to place output, set the SY-lsind field. The system accepts only index values, which correspond to existing list levels. It then deletes all existing list levels whose index is greater or equal to the index specify. For example, if you set SY-LSIND to 0, the system deletes all secondary lists and overwrites the basic list with the current secondary list. Q.What are the page headers for secondary lists? Ans: On secondary lists, the system does not display a standard page header and it does not trigger the event. TOP-OF-PAGE. To create page headers for secondary list, you must enhance TOP-OF-PAGE: Syntax TOP-OF-PAGE DURING LINE-SELECTION. The system triggers this event for each secondary list. If you want to create different page headers for different list levels, you must program the processing block of this event accordingly, for example by using system fields such as SY-LSIND or SY-PFKEY in control statements (IF, CASE). Q.How to use messages in lists? Ans: ABAP/4 allows you to react to incorrect or doubtful user input by displaying messages that influence the program flow depending on how serious the error was. Handling messages is mainly a topic of dialog programming. You store and maintain messages in Table T100. Messages are sorted by language, by a two-character ID, and by a three-digit number. You can assign different message types to each message you output. The influence of a message on the program flow depends on the message type. In our program, use the MESSAGE statement to output messages statically or dynamically and to determine the message type. Syntax:REPORT MESSAGE-ID . Q.What are the user interfaces of interactive lists? Ans: If you want the user to communicate with the system during list display, the list must be interactive. You can define specific interactive possibilities in the status of the list’s user interface (GUI). To define the statuses of interfaces in the R/3 system, use the Menu Painter tool. In the Menu Painter, assign function codes to certain interactive functions. After an user action occurs on the completed interface, the ABAP/4 processor checks the function code and, if valid, triggers the corresponding event. Q.What are the drill-down features provided by ABAP/4 in interactive lists? Ans: ABAP/4 provides some interactive events on lists such as AT LINE-SELECTION (double click) or AT USER-COMMAND (pressing a button). You can use these events to move through layers of information about individual items in a list. Q.What is meant by stacked list? Ans: A stacked list is nothing but secondary list and is displayed on a full-size screen unless you have specified its coordinates using the window command. Q.Is the basic list deleted when the new list is created? Ans: No. It is not deleted and you can return back to it using one of the standard navigation functions like clicking on the back button or the cancel button. Q.What is meant by hotspots? Ans: A Hotspot is a list area where the mouse pointer appears as an upright hand symbol. When a user points to that area (and the hand cursor is active), a single click does the same thing as a double-click. Hotspots are supported from R/3 release 3.0c. Q.How does the interection between the Dynpro and the ABAP/4 Modules takes place? Ans: A transaction is a collection os screens and ABAP/4 routines, controlled and executed by a Dialog processor. The Dialog processor processes screen after the screen, thereby triggering the appropriate ABAP/4 processing of each screen .For each screen,the system executes the flow logic that contains the corresponding ABAP/4 processing.The controls passes from screen flow logic to ABAP/4 code and back. Q.How does the Dialog handle user requests? Ans: when an action is performed ,the system triggers the PROCESS AFTER INPUT event.The data passed includes field screen data data entered by the user and a function code. A functioncode is a technical name that has been allocated in a screen Painter or Menu Painter to a meny entry,a push button,the ENTER key or a function Key of a screen.An internal work field(ok-code)in the PAI module evaluates the function code,and the appropriate action is taken. Q.What is to be defined for a push button fields in the screen attributes? Ans: A function code has to be defined in the screen attributes for the push buttons in a screen. Q.How are the function code handles in Flow Logic? Ans: When the User selects a function in a transaction ,the system copies the function code into a specially designated work field called OK_CODE.This field is Global in ABAP/4 Module Pool.The OK_CODE can then be evaluated in the corresponding PAI module. The function code is always passed in Exactly the same way , regardless of Whether it comes from a screen’s pushbutton,a menu option ,function key or other GUI element. Q.What is roll area? Ans: A roll area contains the program’s runtime context. In addition to the runtime stack and other structures, all local variables and any data known to the program are stored here. Q.How does the system handle roll areas for external program components? Ans: Transactions run in their own roll areas. Reports run in their own roll areas. Dialog modules run in their own roll areas Function modules run in the roll area of their callers. Q.Does the external program run in the same SAP LUW as the caller, or in a separate one? Ans: Transactions run with a separate SAP LUW Reports run with a separate SAP LUW. Dialog modules run in the same SAP LUW as the caller Function modules run in the same SAP LUW as the caller. The only exceptions to the above rules are function modules called with IN UPDATE TASK (V2 function only) or IN BACKGROUND TASK (ALE applications). These always run in their own (separate) update transactions. Q.What are function modules? Ans: Function modules are general-purpose library routines that are available system-wide. Q.What are the problems in processing batch input sessions? How is batch input process different from processing online? Ans: If batch-input session is terminated with errors, it appears in the list of INCORRECT session and it can be processed again. To correct session, first you can analyze the session. The analysis function allows to determine which screen and value produced error. If you find small errors in the data, you can correct them interactively, otherwise you need to modify batch input program, which are generated the session or many times even the data file. While batch input is a two-step procedure, call transaction does both steps online one right after the other. In this method, you call a transaction from your program. Q.What do you define in the domain and data element? Ans: Domain: Parameters to be passed 1.Data Type: where you need to enter the data type available in SAP 2.Field Length: Field Length in the number of valid position 3.Value Table: name of a table to be entered, the fields referring to the domain may only assume values contained in the value table. Data Element: Parameters to be passed when creating a data element. 1.Short Text: Mandatory Fields 2.Domain: A mandatory field. 3.Text Element: You can enter description in short or long text for the field. This text is used when entering data for these fields. Q.What is a collect statement? How is it different from append? Ans: Collect searches in the internal table for an entry, all of whose alphanumeric fields are identical with those of the entry in the work area or header line. If such an entry is found, COLLECT adds all numeric fields from work area or header line to the corresponding fields in the table entry. Otherwise the collect statement appends the contents of the work area or header line to the end of the table. The APPEND statement stores the contents of the header line at the end of the internal table. Q.What is open sql vs native sql? Ans: Open SQL allow you to access database tables declared in the ABAP dictionary regardless of the database platform that you R/3 system is using. Native SQL allows you to use database specific SQL statements in an ABAP program. This means that you can use database tables that are not administered by the ABAP dictionary and therefore integrate data that is not part of the R/3 system. As a rule, an ABAP program containing database-specific SQL statements will not run under different database system. If your program will be used on more than one database platform, only use Open SQL statements. Q.What does an EXEC SQL stmt do in ABAP? What is the disadvantage of using it? Ans: Executes the Native SQL statements enclosed between EXEC SQL and ENDEXEC statements. Unlike Open SQL Native SQL statements can address tables that are not declared in the ABAP Dictionary. Example Creating the Table AVERI_CLNT: EXEC SQL. CREATE TABLE AVERI_CLNT ( CLIENT CHAR(3) NOT NULL, ARG1 CHAR(3) NOT NULL, ARG2 CHAR(3) NOT NULL, FUNCTION CHAR(10) NOT NULL, PRIMARY KEY (CLIENT, ARG1, ARG2) ) ENDEXEC. In a Native SQL statement, data is passed between the ABAP program and the database using host variables. A host variable is an ABAP variable that is identified as such in the Native SQL statement by a preceding colon (:). Example Displaying an extract from the table AVERI_CLNT: DATA: F1(3), F2(3), F3(3). F3 = ' 1 '. EXEC SQL. SELECT CLIENT, ARG1 INTO :F1, :F2 FROM AVERI_CLNT WHERE ARG2 = :F3 ENDEXEC. WRITE: / F1, F2. To simplify the form of the INTO lists in the SELECT statement, you can, as in Open SQL, specify a single structure as the target area. Q.What is the meaning of ABAP editor integrated with ABAP data dictionary? Ans: Integration means if you double-click an object to select it, the Workbench automatically launches the tool that was used to create the object. SAP has developed the Object Navigator to help you to organize your application development in this integrated environment. It provides a context that makes it easier for you to trace the relationships between objects in a program. Rather than working with tools and recalling development objects, you work with objects and allow the Workbench to launch the appropriate tool for an object. Q.What are the events in ABAP language? Ans: An ABAP/4 using events that are invoked by the user actions. Processing blocks are defined by event-keywords and are executed on invocation of certain relevant events. By default, the event start-of-selection is attached to all events in ABAP/4. In your programs you can define a processing block and attach this block to an event keyword. Q.What is a function group? Ans: Function groups are containers for function modules. You cannot execute a function group. When you call a function module, the system loads the whole of its function group into the internal session of the calling program (if it has not already been loaded). The name of a function group can be up to 26 characters long. This is used by the system to create the components of the group (main program and corresponding include programs). When you create a function group or function module in the function builder, the main program and include programs are generated automatically. Q.What happens when a table is activated in DD? Ans: When tables, types (data elements, structures, table types) and views are activated, they are placed at the disposal of the runtime environment in the form of runtime objects. These runtime objects contain the information about the object in a form that is optimal for access by ABAP programs and screens. The runtime objects are buffered so that ABAP programs and screens can access the information relevant to them quickly. Q.What is a check table and what is a value table? Ans: Check table specified in the foreign key for the field. A foreign key links two tables T1 and T2 by assigning fields of table T1 to the primary key fields of table T2. The T1 is called foreign key table (dependent table) and table T2 the check table (referenced table). In some cases you can see when you define a domain that all the table fields or structure components referring to this domain should be checked against a certain table. This information can be stored in the domain by entering a value table. The system proposes the value table as check table when you try to define a foreign key for the field or component. This proposal can be overridden. Example: Domain S_CARR_ID (data type CHAR, length 3) in the flight Model describes the three-place code of the airlines. All the airlines are listed together with their codes in table SCARR. It is generally advisable to check fields referring to domain S_CARR_ID against table SCARR. SCARR is therefore entered as value table for domain S_CARR_ID. If you want to define a foreign key for a field referring to S_CARR_ID, SCARR is proposed as the check table. A check is not implemented by simply entering a value table! The check against the value table only takes effect when a foreign key has been defined. Q.What are select options and what is the diff from parameters? Ans: Select options you specify are displayed on the selection screen for the user to enter values. Incase of select option user can enter a range of values. But in parameters user can enter only single value. Q.How do you validate the selection criteria of a report? And how do you display initial values in a selection screen? Ans: You can validate selection criteria of a report using at selection-screen event. You can display the initial values using default option of select-options. Q.What are selection texts? Ans: Description of specified selection text (SELECT-OPTION, PARAMETER). This description appears on the selection screen. Texts on the selection screen are stored as language-specific selection-texts in the program text elements. Q.What is CTS and what do you know about it? Ans: A change request is a list in the system, where mainly contains the object to be transported. It also contains the transport type, the request category and the target system. When the change request is created either manually or automatically the system assigns a number to it automatically and this number is known as change request number. The change request records all modifications made to development object. When the changes have been made and the change tasks have been released, the change request can be released. SE09 will display and check all the change request. Q.When a program is created and need to be transported to production does selection texts always go with it? if not how do you make sure? Can you change the CTS entries? How do you do it? Ans: Whenever selection texts are changed or created it will ask for change request, if a development class is assigned to the program. Using the change request number you can transport the selection texts. Yes. You can change the CTS entries using transaction se09. Q.Difference between a check table and a value table? Ans: Value Table This is maintained at Domain Level. When ever you create a domain , you can entered allowed values. For example you go to Domain SHKZG - Debit/credit indicator. Here only allowed values is H or S. When ever you use this Domain, the system will forces you to enter only these values. This is a sort of master check . To be maintained as a customization object. This mean that if you want to enter values to this table you have to create a development request & transport the same. Check table For example you have Employee master table & Employee Transaction table. When ever an employee Transacts we need to check whether that employee exists , so we can refer to the employee master table. This is nothing but a Parent & Child relationship . Here data can be maintained at client level , no development involved. As per DBMS what we call foregin key table, is called as check table in SAP. Q.What is use of using HASHED TABLE? Ans: Hashed table is useful when your have to work with very big internal table and to read it with "READ TABLE WITH KEY ..." The time access is constant ! Definition of a Hashed Table: "Defines the table as one that is managed with an internal hash procedure. You can imagine a hashed table as a set, whose elements you can address using their unique key. Unlike standard and sorted tables, you cannot access hash tables using an index. All entries in the table must have a unique key. contact for more on SAP ABAP Online Training

SAP Basis Interview Questions

Q.What is difference between 4.7, ECC 5 and ECC6 from SAP Security point of view? Ans: SAP GRC which is a security tool can be implemented only to ECC 5.0 and ECC 6.0 but not to the 4.7EE. SAP 4.7 is an ABAP based system, here we can see only about R/3 security. SAP ECC5.0 and SAP ECC6.0 included both ABAP + JAVA stacks, means enterprise portal also included here we can have both R/3 security for ABAP stack and JAVA stack security which includes in portal concept(Enterprise Portal Security). SAP GRC which is a security tool can be implemented only to ECC 5.0 and ECC 6.0 but not to the 4.7EE. Q.What do you mean by profile and object? Ans: Well, profile is a authorization profile and where as object can be an authorization class or authorization object or field and value. So, to make up a profile it requires several objects..... More precisely profile is set of different authorizations for different objects. It means when you create role and go for generating profile whatever the list of transactions you have added in role menu its corresponding objects automatically fetch up by profile generator. For which transaction which objects get fetch up this you can check using SU24 tcode only objects with check/maintain status get fetch up by profile generator during profile generation. And for better understanding you just keep in mind for every tcode there are certain set of objects. And Each objects has different fields and its value is called its value i.e. 01, 02, 03 create, change, display respectively. Q.What is the profile? Ans: Profile is what a user can do within that role that is assigned to the user. When a role is created; a profile is created based on the authorization data i.e. object class, authorization object, filed and values. The word "profile" is used in 2 different concepts. 1) Authorization Profiles 2) System Profiles Authorization Profile:This profile is the one created when a role is created and is called as authorization profile. System Profile: This profile exists to change the parameters for the instances... Q.I want a list of users along with roles for a client? How to do it? Ans: We can use tcode se16 in it AGR_USERS uname: enter the user ids and AGRname: role name Youcan get in SUIM also. Q.In an environment of derived roles; a user is asking for a t-code; which is not found in suim in search of roles? What will u do? Ans: Check if the tcode exists or not. Try to search the role with S_tcode and then putting the tcode in "roles by complex selection criteria" You should at least get SAP standard role which should not be assigned. So after doing all these you are not able to find any end user role available in system. Next step is the proposal of adding the tcode to a suitable role. as it's a derived role envi---> need to add the tcode in template / parent role Take approval from BPR/role owner for role modification. They will decide which parent role to change. Change role in Dev and transport to rest of the sys in landscape Q.Can u secure profiles? If so , how to do it ? Ans: Yes you can. Secure Profile S_User_PRF Q.I want to lock all the users except sap* and DDIC of a particular client ? Ans: SU10 F4 on user id field Change the hit list restriction according to users present Enter It will bring all available users Remove SAP* and DDIC from list Select all and enter It will bring u back to SU10 With all users except SAP* and DDIC Select all Lock it will lock your user also (OR) We can do it by ewz5 Q.I want to delete 1000 users of a particular client, how can I do it? Ans: You can create a SECATT script to delete the users which is easy to create and easy to execute. You can also delete users of a particular client by using t-code su10. Q.Can u tell me some of the password related parameters ? Ans: Password related parameters are: login/min_password_lng (Defines minimum length for password) login/min_password_digits login/password_expiration_time These are the main parameters - which can be maintained via RZ10 (OR) You can go to t-code se16 Write login/* and enter ... then u will get all login parameters Here there is no need of remembering Q.How can I assign a same role to 200 users? Ans: You can do using PFCG- > enter the role -> change -> go to users tab -> paste the users -> click on user comparison-> complete comparison -> Save the role - it's done (OR) One can also use "Authorization Data" functionality in transaction SU10 to complete this task. Q.A user is asking for a t-code to assign? How do you assign the t-code? Ans: First we have to check if user has access to particular tcode. If not then run suim with roles by complex selection criteria -->put object1 as S_tcode as the required tcode and hit execute button. The query will fetch you a result of roles. Select a role that has minimum authorization and satisfy the user requirement. And assign the role to user. Q.A user is not able to execute a t-code; how do you solve that? What are the different reasons that might be existing? Ans: Reason: Tcode does not exist User context missing auth for that tcode User comparison is not current How to solve: 1.check if the user is having the tcode or not. by SUIM--> role by complex selection criteria if the tcode is not assigned to user -->assign suiatablle role after taking approval. Make sure to user compare to update the user master record 3.if the tcode is available for the user and user still cant access--> ask for result of SU53 screen shot, there might be some other authorization which is missing for the user 4.we can also trace the user's auth check by use of st01 fine searching user's missing access by analyzing st01 report and rc. Q.What is difference between se16 and sm31? Ans: SE16: table display SM31: table, view modification Q.What are the authorization objects which are always present in user master record? Ans: For user master record as u must be knowing that different tabs of UMR..So as per my understanding As UMR stores information of users...Like his name, roles assigned to him, License data. Objects which are always present for UMR are: S_USER_AGR, S_USER_GRP,S_USER_AUT,S_USER_PRO and each of this object has its own importance... bcoz S_USER_AGR helps to maintain roles assigned, S_USER_GRP helps to maintain Auth. group in Logon Data and S_USER_AUT AND S_USER_PRO helps to maintain set of Auth. profiles and different Authorizations included in each profile. Q.What is use of System Task Tab on menu bar in PFCG? Ans: Role creation, change and delete. Q.How can we Lock transaction? What happens exactly? Ans: In SM01 transaction we can lock the transactions; we can lock one or many at a time in the system. After locking transactions, it won’t allow any body to use the transaction. (OR) SM01 transaction can use to lock the transactions; we can lock one or many at a time in the system. When a user starts a transaction, the system checks in table TSTC whether the transaction code is valid and whether the system administrator has locked the transaction. Q.What is Use of SM35P and SM35 is there any difference between these two? Ans: Tcode SM35P use to display/monitor sessions. Using Tcode SM35 you the run/process the sessions in background or foreground. Q.Is there any transaction to see Transport Log.? Means, Which data or roles have been transported from which system at what time? Ans: SE01 transaction is use to see Transport Log. By clicking tab "DISPLAY" you can able to see the logs. You can also see the roles or data has been transported from which system at what time. Q.Which role is commonly used? Ans: Composite and single role commonly used. Q.How to find the already locked users list before a particular date? Ans: Example: list of users already locked before 01/01/2010 Goto SUIM - USERS - USERS BY COMPLEX SELECTION CRITERIA,scroll down to the bottom, goto ADDTIONAL SELECTION CRITERIA, then give the validity date and check the check box of the option LOCKED USERS ONLY, then execute, u will get the list of the locked users. Q.What is the correct procedure for Mass Generation of Roles ? Ans: 1)Tcode SPUC is for mass generation of roles. Or you can use scripts 2)Program SAPPROFC_NEW inserted roles to be generated and execute. 3)PFCG > Utilities > Mass Generation Q.Can we assign generated profiles to users directly ? Ans: No, we can't assign a generated profile to user directly; we have to as the role associated with that particular profile The best practice is not to assign profile to a user master record. But then we can assign... Check it for example, assign sap_all to a user master record and can actually work. So, yes a profile can be assigned to user and can work. Q.How many maximum profiles we can assign to one user ? Ans: apprx 312 Q.In which way we can assign single role to many users (more than 5000 users) ? Ans: Go to Su10 Click on authorization data Click on multiple selection button beside user input field a pop up will appear-->click on green import from text file Give the destination of the excel sheet where you have already kept 5000 users Execute-->execute-->select all -->transfer this will bring all 5000 users in su10 Now change--> role tab--> assign the single role-->save Q.I want to see list of roles assigned to 10 different users. How do you do it ? Ans: 1.Go to SE16 Transaction 2.Type agr_users and go to next screen 3.in the user’s field I have the list of user ids 4.Result (OR) GO to suim -->ROLES-->By user assignment Click multiple selection Select user’s ans execute Now you get a list roles assign to selected users Q.What is the advantage of CUA from a layman/manager point of view ? Ans: CUA - Central User Administration Advantage of CUA is to lessen the time by creating users in one single system, and distribute it to the respective systems (where the user id is requested)Helps in avoiding logging to each individual systems. Layman point of view we don’t have any advantage, But SAP security admin point it takes lesser time for user Admin. Q.how do we create firefigter Id in VIRSAs VRAT ? Ans: First create service user and mapp this user in /n/virsa/vFat Q.What is the procedure to delete a role ? Ans: First add the role that need to be deleted in a Transport. Then delete it. If there is no transport already, then create one for it and then add the role marked for deletion to it and then only we have to delete the role. If the role is deleted without adding it to a transport then we will not be able to delete the same role in other systems like Acceptance / Quality / Production in CUA Environment. Q.What is the main difference between role and profile ? Ans: Roles are the set of authorizations. Profiles are sub component of roles. We can assign role to user but not profile. Roles are collection of different transactions, reports/web links where its profile is nothing but set of authorizations which defines the behavior of transactions listed in Role Menu. And another difference could be we canassign roles to user using PFCG but we cannot assign manually created or generated profile directly to users using PFCG. Q.How do I assign roles to a specific group, not to a specific user, and apply the roles to all users in that group? This particular group has four users? Ans: Go to suim,enter the user group name in user by complex selection criteria, execute user's list,execute su10 enter list of user's and assign role to them Q.What is fire fighter? When we are using fire fighter? Ans: Fire Fighter is used if you have implemented Virsa/GRC Fire Fighter is Virsa tool, this used to execute critical tcode when doing configuration Fire fighter is also a normal user ID but having some specific access as per the needs. User type is kept as "service user' When it is used: Say, in your project you are security administrator who Does not have access to direct SU01 but you needs the access urgently. Then FFID owner/administrator assigns you a FFID for limited period so that you can perform the task from your login ID and pwd, using tcode /n/virsa/vfat and login with that FFID. While logging you will be prompted to give business reason for access. Everything you perform in that period gets recorded for auditing. Q.What are the components in VIRSA tool and GRC? Ans: In GRC we have these tools: Access Enforcer Complaince Caliber Role expert Fire Fighter In VERAS Tool we have: VRAT and VFAT Q.How to create new authorization object? Ans: Using SU21 we can create the New Authorization Object Q.Can anyone tell me what the use of SU24 and SU25 transaction code is exactly? Ans: SU25: A transaction that copies SAP defaults from USBOT & USOBX to USOBT_C and USOBX_C. USOBT is a table that consists of transactions and authorization objects. It stores default values of authorization from authorization objects. USOBX is a table that defines the necessary authorization checks that needs to be performed within a transaction. Initially both tables USOBT and USOBX consist of default values. These two tables are then used for fill up of the customer tables USBOT_C and USOBT_X through the transaction SU25. SU24: A transaction that maintains the assignment of authorization objects in the customer tables USOBT_C and USOBX_C. Q.What is the difference b/w Copy Roles and Derived Roles? Ans: In derived role, all the transactions of parent role r copied but not the org structure and auth. and we can’t add more transactions in derived role. In copy roles all the transactions with auth are copied Q.What is temp role and copy role? Ans: Temp role: - it is the sap standard role, which is defined by sap. Copy role: - copy from an existing role is copy role. Q.What are various user types? Ans: Dialog (A) System (B) Communication (C) Service (S) Reference (L) Dialog users are used for individual user. Check for expired/initial passwords.Possible to change your own password. Check for multiple dialog logon A Service user - Only user administrators can change the password.No check for expired/initial passwords. Multiple logon permitted System users are not capable of interaction and are used to perform certain system activities, such as background processing, ALE, Workflow, and so on. A Reference user is, like a System user, a general, non-personally related, user. Additional authorizations can be assigned within the system using a reference user. A reference user for additional rights can be assigned for every user in the Roles tab. Q.Describe how SAP handles Memory Management? Ans: ST02 / ST03 In general via table buffers, you could go into the whole Work Process, roll in, roll out, heap (private) memory, etc. however just as a Unix or DBA admin would know, is you look this up when needed for the exact specifics. Q.When we should use Transactional RFC ? Ans: A "transactional RFC" means, that either both parties agree that the data was correctly transfered - or not. There is no "half data transfer". Q.What is a developer key? and how to generate a developer key? Ans: The developer key is a combination of you installation number, your license key (that you get from http://service.sap.com/licensekey) and the user name. You need this for each person that will make changes (Dictionary or programs) in the system. Q.How should I set priority for Printing say like user, team lead, project manager? Ans: There's nothing like "priority" settings for spool processes. Just define more (profile parameter rdisp/wp_no_spool) processes so people don't need to wait. Q.Why do you use DDIC user not SAP* for Support Packs and SPAM? Ans: Do _NOT_ use neither DDIC nor SAP* for applying support packages. Copy DDIC to a separate user and use that user to apply them Q.What is the use of profile paramater ztta/roll_area? Ans: The value specifies the size of the roll area in bytes. The roll area is one of several memory areas, which satisfies the user requests of user programs. For technical reasons, however, the first 250 KB or so of a user context are always stored in the roll area, further data - up to the roll area limit ztta/roll_first, - in the extended memory, up to the limit ztta/roll_extension or if extended memory is exhausted, then - again in the roll area, until the roll area is full, then - in the local process area, up to the limit abap/heap_area_dia or abap/heap_area_total or until the address space or the swap space is exhausted. Followed by termination with errors like STORAGE_PARAMETERS_WRONG_SET an error code, that points to memory bottleneck Minimum data transfer with context change; however, the increase helps to avoid problems (address space, swap space, operating system paging). Q.What are the various configuration methods available in STMS? Ans: 1. Single system configuration Development and Production systems Three systems in a group Q.What is a standard transport layer? Ans: This describes the transport route that the data from the development systems follows. Q.What is SAP transport layer? Ans: It is a predefined transport layer for DEV classes of SAP standard objects Q.What are the various qualifier option or what are the various import options? Ans: There are six import options Leave transport request in queue for later import Import transport request again Overwrite originals Overwrite objects in unconfirmed repairs Ignore unpermitted transport type Ignore predecessor relations contact for more on SAP Basis Online Training Write A Review

SAP BODS Interview Questions

Q.What is the use of BusinessObjects Data Services? Answer: BusinessObjects Data Services provides a graphical interface that allows you to easily create jobs that extract data from heterogeneous sources, transform that data to meet the business requirements of your organization, and load the data into a single location. Q.Define Data Services components. Answer: Data Services includes the following standard components: Designer Repository Job Server Engines Access Server Adapters Real-time Services Address Server Cleansing Packages, Dictionaries, andDirectories Management Console Q.What are the steps included in Data integration process? Answer: Stage data in an operational datastore, data warehouse, or data mart. Update staged data in batch or real-time modes. Create a single environment for developing, testing, and deploying the entire data integration platform. Manage a single metadata repository to capture the relationships between different extraction and access methods and provide integrated lineage and impact analysis. Q.Define the terms Job, Workflow, and Dataflow Answer: A job is the smallest unit of work that you can schedule independently for execution. A work flow defines the decision-making process for executing data flows. Data flows extract, transform, and load data. Everything having to do with data, including reading sources, transforming data, and loading targets, occurs inside a data flow. Q.Arrange these objects in order by their hierarchy: Dataflow, Job, Project, and Workflow. Answer Project, Job, Workflow, Dataflow. Q.What are reusable objects in DataServices? Answer: Job, Workflow, Dataflow. Q.What is a transform? Answer: A transform enables you to control how datasets change in a dataflow. Q.What is a Script? Answer: A script is a single-use object that is used to call functions and assign values in a workflow. Q.What is a real time Job? Answer: Real-time jobs "extract" data from the body of the real time message received and from any secondary sources used in the job. Q.What is an Embedded Dataflow? Answer: An Embedded Dataflow is a dataflow that is called from inside another dataflow. Q.What is the difference between a data store and a database? Answer: A datastore is a connection to a database. Q.How many types of datastores are present in Data services? Answer: Three. Database Datastores: provide a simple way to import metadata directly froman RDBMS. Application Datastores: let users easily import metadata frommost Enterprise Resource Planning (ERP) systems. Adapter Datastores: can provide access to an application’s data and metadata or just metadata. Q.What is the use of Compace repository? Answer: Remove redundant and obsolete objects from the repository tables. Q.What are Memory Datastores? Answer: Data Services also allows you to create a database datastore using Memory as the Database type. Memory Datastores are designed to enhance processing performance of data flows executing in real-time jobs. Q.What are file formats? Answer: A file format is a set of properties describing the structure of a flat file (ASCII). File formats describe the metadata structure. File format objects can describe files in: Delimited format — Characters such as commas or tabs separate each field. Fixed width format — The column width is specified by the user. SAP ERP and R/3 format. Q.Which is NOT a datastore type? Answer: File Format Q.What is repository? List the types of repositories. Answer: The DataServices repository is a set of tables that holds user-created and predefined system objects, source and target metadata, and transformation rules. There are 3 types of repositories. A local repository A central repository A profiler repository Q.What is the difference between a Repository and a Datastore? Answer: A Repository is a set of tables that hold system objects, source and target metadata, and transformation rules. A Datastore is an actual connection to a database that holds data. Q.What is the difference between a Parameter and a Variable? Answer: A Parameter is an expression that passes a piece of information to a work flow, data flow or custom function when it is called in a job. A Variable is a symbolic placeholder for values. Q.When would you use a global variable instead of a local variable? Answer: When the variable will need to be used multiple times within a job. When you want to reduce the development time required for passing values between job components. When you need to create a dependency between job level global variable name and job components. Q.What is Substitution Parameter? Answer: The Value that is constant in one environment, but may change when a job is migrated to another environment. Q.List some reasons why a job might fail to execute? Answer: Incorrect syntax, Job Server not running, port numbers for Designer and Job Server not matching. Q.List factors you consider when determining whether to run work flows or data flows serially or in parallel? Answer: Consider the following: Whether or not the flows are independent of each other Whether or not the server can handle the processing requirements of flows running at the same time (in parallel) Q.What does a lookup function do? How do the different variations of the lookup function differ? Answer: All lookup functions return one row for each row in the source. They differ in how they choose which of several matching rows to return. Q.List the three types of input formats accepted by the Address Cleanse transform. Answer: Discrete, multiline, and hybrid. Q.Name the transform that you would use to combine incoming data sets to produce a single output data set with the same schema as the input data sets. Answer: The Merge transform. Q.What are Adapters? Answer: Adapters are additional Java-based programs that can be installed on the job server to provide connectivity to other systems such as Salesforce.com or the JavaMessagingQueue. There is also a SoftwareDevelopment Kit (SDK) to allow customers to create adapters for custom applications. Q.List the data integrator transforms Answer: Data_Transfer Date_Generation Effective_Date Hierarchy_Flattening History_Preserving Key_Generation Map_CDC_Operation Pivot Reverse Pivot Table_Comparison XML_Pipeline Q.List the Data Quality Transforms Answer: Global_Address_Cleanse Data_Cleanse Match Associate Country_id USA_Regulatory_Address_Cleanse Q.What are Cleansing Packages? Answer: These are packages that enhance the ability of Data Cleanse to accurately process various forms of global data by including language-specific reference data and parsing rules. Q.What is Data Cleanse? Answer: The Data Cleanse transform identifies and isolates specific parts of mixed data, and standardizes your data based on information stored in the parsing dictionary, business rules defined in the rule file, and expressions defined in the pattern file. Q.What is the difference between Dictionary and Directory? Answer: Directories provide information on addresses from postal authorities. Dictionary files are used to identify, parse, and standardize data such as names, titles, and firm data. Q.Give some examples of how data can be enhanced through the data cleanse transform, and describe the benefit of those enhancements. Answer: Enhancement Benefit Determine gender distributions and target Gender Codes marketing campaigns Provide fields for improving matching Match Standards results Q.A project requires the parsing of names into given and family, validating address information, and finding duplicates across several systems. Name the transforms needed and the task they will perform. Answer: Data Cleanse: Parse names into given and family. Address Cleanse: Validate address information. Match: Find duplicates. Q.Describe when to use the USA Regulatory and Global Address Cleanse transforms. Answer: Use the USA Regulatory transform if USPS certification and/or additional options such as DPV and Geocode are required. Global Address Cleanse should be utilized when processing multi-country data. Q.Give two examples of how the Data Cleanse transform can enhance (append) data. Answer: The Data Cleanse transform can generate name match standards and greetings. It can also assign gender codes and prenames such as Mr. and Mrs. Q.What are name match standards and how are they used? Answer: Name match standards illustrate the multiple ways a name can be represented. They are used in the match process to greatly increase match results. Q.What are the different strategies you can use to avoid duplicate rows of data when re-loading a job. Answer: Using the auto-correct load option in the target table. Including the Table Comparison transform in the data flow. Designing the data flow to completely replace the target table during each execution. Including a preload SQL statement to execute before the table loads. Q.What is the use of Auto Correct Load? Answer: It does not allow duplicated data entering into the target table. It works like Type 1 Insert else Update the rows based on Non-matching and matching data respectively. Q.What is the use of Array fetch size? Answer: Array fetch size indicates the number of rows retrieved in a single request to a source database. The default value is 1000. Higher numbers reduce requests, lowering network traffic, and possibly improve performance. The maximum value is 5000 Q.What are the differences between Row-by-row select and Cached comparison table and sorted input in Table Comparison Transform? Answer: Row-by-row select —look up the target table using SQL every time it receives an input row. This option is best if the target table is large. Cached comparison table — To load the comparison table into memory. This option is best when the table fits into memory and you are comparing the entire target table Sorted input — To read the comparison table in the order of the primary key column(s) using sequential read. This option improves performance because Data Integrator reads the comparison table only once. Add a query between the source and the Table_Comparison transform. Then, from the query’s input schema, drag the primary key columns into the Order By box of the query. Q.What is the use of using Number of loaders in Target Table? Answer: Number of loaders loading with one loader is known as Single loader Loading. Loading when the number of loaders is greater than one is known as Parallel Loading. The default number of loaders is 1. The maximum number of loaders is 5. Q.What is the use of Rows per commit? Answer: Specifies the transaction size in number of rows. If set to 1000, Data Integrator sends a commit to the underlying database every 1000 rows. Q.What is the difference between lookup (), lookup_ext () and lookup_seq ()? Answer: lookup() : Briefly, It returns single value based on single condition lookup_ext(): It returns multiple values based on single/multiple condition(s) lookup_seq(): It returns multiple values based on sequence number Q.What is the use of History preserving transform? Answer: The History_Preserving transform allows you to produce a new row in your target rather than updating an existing row. You can indicate in which columns the transform identifies changes to be preserved. If the value of certain columns change, this transform creates a new row for each row flagged as UPDATE in the input data set. Q.What is the use of Map-Operation Transfrom? Answer: The Map_Operation transform allows you to change operation codes on data sets to produce the desired output. Operation codes: INSERT UPDATE, DELETE, NORMAL, or DISCARD. Q.What is Heirarchy Flatenning? Answer: Constructs a complete hierarchy from parent/child relationships, and then produces a description of the hierarchy in vertically or horizontally flattened format. Parent Column, Child Column Parent Attributes, Child Attributes. Q.What is the use of Case Transform? Answer: Use the Case transform to simplify branch logic in data flows by consolidating case or decision-making logic into one transform. The transform allows you to split a data set into smaller sets based on logical branches. Q.What must you define in order to audit a data flow? Answer: You must define audit points and audit rules when you want to audit a data flow. Q.List some factors for PERFORMANCE TUNING in data services? Answer: The following sections describe ways you can adjust Data Integrator performance Source-based performance options Using array fetch size Caching data Join ordering Minimizing extracted data Target-based performance options Loading method and rows per commit Staging tables to speed up auto-correct loads Job design performance options Improving throughput Maximizing the number of pushed-down operations Minimizing data type conversion Minimizing locale conversion Improving Informix repository performance contact for more on SAP BODS Online Training

SAP BW On Hana Interview Questions

Q.What Is The Time Distribution Option In Update Rule? Ans: This is to distribute data per time; for example, if the source contains calendar week and the target contains calendar day, the data is spit for each calendar day. you can select either the normal calendar or the factory calendar. Q.What Is The Language Sap Hana Is Developed In? Ans: The SAP HANA database is developed in C++. Q.What Is Ad Hoc Analysis? Ans: In traditional data warehouses, such as SAP BW, a lot of pre-aggregation is done for quick results. That is the administrator (IT department) decides which information might be needed for analysis and prepares the result for the end users. This results in fast performance but the end user does not have flexibility. The performance reduces dramatically if the user wants to do analysis on some data that is not already pre-aggregated. With SAP HANA and its speedy engine, no pre-aggregation is required. The user can perform any kind of operations in their reports and does not have to wait hours to get the data ready for analysis. Q.What Are The Types Of Attributes? Ans: Display only and navigational; display only attributes are only for display and no analysis can be done; navigational attributes behave like regular characteristics; for example, assume that we have a customer characteristics with country as a navigational attribute; you can analyze the data using customer and country. Q.What Are The Row-based And Column Based Approach? Ans: Row based tables: It is the traditional Relational Database approach It store a table in a sequence of rows Column based tables: It store a table in a sequence of columns i.e. the entries of a column is stored in contiguous memory locations. SAP HANA is particularly optimized for column-order storage. SAP HANA supports both row-based and column-based approach. Q.Can You Partition A Cube Which Has Data Already? Ans: No; the cube must be empty to do this; one work around is to make a copy of the cube A to cube B; export data from A to B using export data source; empty cube A; create partition on A; re-import data from B; delete cube B. Q.How Does Sap Hana Support Massively Parallel Processing? Ans: With availability of Multi-Core CPUs, higher CPU execution speeds can be achieved. Also, HANA Column-based storage makes it easy to execute operations in parallel using multiple processor cores. In a column store data is already vertically partitioned. This means that operations on different columns can easily be processed in parallel. If multiple columns need to be searched or aggregated, each of these operations can be assigned to a different processor core. In addition, operations on one column can be parallelized by partitioning the column into multiple sections that can be processed by different processor cores. With the SAP HANA database, queries can be executed rapidly and in parallel. Q.What Is The Dim Id? Ans: DIM ID: are used to connect fact tables and dimension tables. Q.What Is An Info Source? Ans: A structure consisting of InfoObjects without persistence for connecting two transformations. Q.What Are The Steps To Load Non-cumulative Cube? Ans: initialize opening balance in R/3 (S278) activate extract structure MCO3BFO for data source 2LIS_03_BF set up historical material documents in R/3 load opening balance using data source 2LIS_40_S278 load historical movements and compress without marker update. set up V3 update load deltas using 2LIS_03_BF. Q. What Is A Transnational Infocube? Ans: These cubes are used for both read and write; standard cubes are optimized for reading. The transactional cubes are used in SEM. Q.What Is A Source System? Ans: Any system that is sending data to BW like R/3, lat file, Oracle database or external systems. Q. Can You Disable Cache? Ans: Yes, either globally or using query debug tool RSRT. Q.What Is Global Transfer Nile? Ans: This is a transfer routine (ABAP) defined at the info object level; this is common for all source systems. Contact for more on SAP BW On Hana Online Training

SAP CS Interview Questions

Q. How Can A Planning Version Be Frozen And Unfrozen? Ans: Planning Version can be frozen and unfrozen using Function Module /SAPCS/TS_PAREA_VERSIO_FREEZE so that no further changes to the planning version can be done. Q. What Is Release Profile? Ans: Release Profile is used to release time series data from DP to SNP/PPDS. You need to define the DP Planning Area and time series key figure the data in which is released and the SNP Category Type (typically FA) to which data is released. You may maintain a Daily Buckets Profile it will define the number of working days (working days determined based on Shipping Calendar maintained for the location master) starting on and from the From Date if released online/ interactively or that many workdays of the planning horizon when release is carried out in background. The Period Split (blank, 1 and 2) field in the SNP2 tab of location-product master determines how demand plan is released to SNP from DP (how bucketed data is disaggregated to the workdays). Q. What Is The Usage Of Period Factor ? Ans: Period Factor maintained in the SNP PPM or Transportation Lane determines the Availability Date of a Receipt element within a time bucket (period). The system determines the exact availability date/time of the receipt elements within a period, by adding a time interval (that it gets by multiplying the period factor with the period length) to the start time of the period. You can enter a factor between 0 and 1, where 0 is the start of the period, 0.5 the middle, and 1 the end of the period. When calculating the availability date/time, the system takes into consideration all weekdays, meaning that it does not take into consideration any days that have been defined as non-workdays in the calendars. Period Factor used is .71 = 7×0.71 = 4.97 or 5 days from ptimizer of weekly bucket resulting in a Friday. If Period Factor is not maintained in PPM or Transportation Lane then the User Period Factor indicator and the Period Factor value maintained in the Lot Size tab of the location-product combination is used. If this is not maintained a default value of 0.5 is used. Q. What Determines Stock Categories Displayed In Stock On Hand Keyfigure ? Ans: The categories defined in Category Group ST1 (can be maintained in table /SAPCS/CSCGC) determine the stock categories that are displayed in the Initial bucket in the Stock on Hand keyfigure. Subsequent buckets are dynamically computed. Q. Does Dynamic Alerts Show Up In Alert Monitor ? Ans: Dynamic Alerts do not show up in the stand-alone alert monitor. Network alerts are to show pegging relationships. Q. What Is The Report To Execute Massd ? Ans: The report for executing MassD in background job is MASSBACK. Q. What Is The Shortcut To Change Location Type In Cs ? Ans: Report /SAPCS/CHECK_LOCATION_TYPE can be used to change location type (say from 1001 to 1002 or vice-versa) of existing locations in CS. The table to refer is /SAPCS/LOCMAP. SAP does not recommend this process. Q. How Can A Transaction Be Executed Even When No Authorization ? Ans: SE93 – Transaction code for Transaction Code E.g. CRC1 Create Resource has txn code CRAH. So if you do not have authorization to create resource you can use SE93 and enter txn CRAH and then Test F8 button to go to the txn. Q. How To Copy A Process Chain ? Ans: To copy a process chain to another process chain, goto the Process Chain you want to copy and then type copy in the tool tar and hit enter. It will allow you to copy the Process Chain to another Process Chain that can be modified as per user’s requirement, saved, activated and used. Q. What Is The Process To Copy Planning Versions In R/3 ? Ans: Use OLIX to first delete previous MRP planning versions. Then use MCB& to create the new MRP planning versions by choosing the appropriate version you want to create as ICO Version. The info structure in this case is S094. Q. How To Use Create Planning Book With Two Tables? Ans: To use two tables on one screen of Planning Book/Data View – select indicator next to second page title and give name. Additional tab page is displayed in Planning Book Maintenance wizard to define the key figures for the second table. Q. What Is Master Data In Dp? Ans: Master Data in Demand Planning primarily is Characteristic Value Combinations commonly termed CVCs. CVCs are the planning combinations against which data is stored in key figures. Q. What Is The Behaviour Of Procurement Type X? Ans: Procurement Type X – source selection is based on matching due date then priority than cost. If both In-house Production and External Procurement is possible then In-house Production (PPM) is chosen as a source of supply. Q. What Is Ppds Fixing Horizon ? Ans: PP/DS fixing Horizon defines the PP/DS time Fence – within that period if heuristic is run no orders get changed. Q. What Is The Reuse Mode In Product Heuristic ? Ans: Reuse mode in Product Heuristic – makes the system to reuse orders already present in the heuristic run i.e. orders are not deleted and recreated. Q. What Is Planning Procedure ? Ans: Planning Procedure in Product Master (PP/DS) defines that when you convert a planned order to process order it is in Deallocated state and not Scheduled state and more. Q. Which Are The Components Of The New Mysap Scm Solution ? Ans: SAP SCM 4.1 is the new available Supply Chain Management Solution offered by SAP. The SAP SCM 4.1 System includes SAP CS 4.1 (Advanced Planning and Optimization), SAP ICH 4.1 (Inventory Collaboration Hub) and SAP EM 4.1 (Event Management). Q. How About The Architecture Of Sap Scm 4.1 ? Ans: SAP SCM 4.1 is based on the SAP Web Application Server 6.40. All SAP SCM 4.1 Architecture Components can be installed on one hardware server, as long as this server is sized for all used application components. Q. What Does Cs Mean ? Ans: SAP CS stands for SAP Advanced Planning and Optimization and is the planning component within the mySAP SCM solution. Q. Can Sap Cs Be Used As A Stand-alone Solution ? Ans: No, SAP CS always requires a backend ERP system for execution functions. In most cases, the backend system is an SAP R/3 system. Q. Can Sap Cs And Sap R/3 Be Installed On The Same Server And Use The Same Database ? Ans: No, SAP CS requires a separate server. The actual size of the SAP CS system may vary and depends on the data volume to be processed. Q. How Does Sap R/3 Communicate With Sap Cs ? Ans: Through the CS Core Interface (CIF) which supplies SAP CS with master and transaction data in real time. CIF is delivered through the R/3 Plug-In, which is something you have to install in your SAP R/3 system. This is the same Plug-In that you need for connecting a BW or a CRM system. Q. What About The Exchange Of Data Between The Two Systems ? Ans: With SAP CS you have a real-time integration to SAP R/3. The minute you change something in one system, it is immediately being transferred to the other and vice versa. And that goes for all data, be it a sales order, a production order or a purchase order. You do not have to perform any batch jobs for transferring data between the systems. Q. Do I Have To Maintain The Master Data Twice ? Ans: No. You create and change master data exclusively in SAP R/3. If you want to work with SAP CS, you need to transfer the master data from the SAP R/3 system. Depending on the scenario you want to use in SAP CS, you may have to enhance the transferred data with SAP CS specific settings, which are not relevant to SAP R/3. Q. What Is An Easy, Cost Efficient Way Of Installing Some Standard Sap Cs Scenarios ? Ans: SAP Best Practices for Supply Chain Management. Choose one or more of the mySAP SCM business scenarios that SAP Best Practices for SCM provide. Contact for more on SAP CS Online Training

SAP Fico Interview Questions

Q.What Is Sap? Ans: SAP is the name of the company founded in 1972 under the German name (Systems, Applications, and Products in Data Processing) is the leading ERP (Enterprise Resource Planning) software package. Q.What Is Erp? Ans: ERP is a package with the techniques and concepts for the integrated management of business as a whole, for effective use of management resources, to improve the efficiency of an enterprise. Initially, ERP was targeted for manufacturing industry mainly for planning and managing core business like production and financial market. As the growth and merits of ERP package ERP software is designed for basic process of a company from manufacturing to small shops with a target of integrating information across the company. Q.Different Types Of Erp? Ans: SAP, BAAN, JD Edwards, Oracle Financials, Siebel, PeopleSoft. Among all the ERP’s most of the companies implemented or trying to implement SAP because of number of advantages over other ERP packages. Q.Explain The Concept Of "business Content" In Sap Business Information Warehouse? Ans: Business Content is a pre-configured set of role and task-relevant information models based on consistent Metadata in the SAP Business Information Warehouse. Business Content provides selected roles within a company with the information they need to carry out their tasks. These information models essentially contain roles, workbooks, queries, InfoSources, InfoCubes, key figures, characteristics, update rules and extractors for SAP R/3, mySAP.com Business Applications and other selected applications. Q.Why Do You Usually Choose To Implement Sap? Ans: There are number of technical reasons numbers of companies are planning to implement SAP. It’s highly configurable, highly secure data handling, min data redundancy, max data consistency, you can capitalize on economics of sales like purchasing, tight integration-cross function. Q.Can Bw Run Without A Sap R/3 Implementation? Ans: Certainly. You can run BW without R/3 implementation. You can use pre-defined business content in BW using your non-SAP data. Here you simply need to map the transfer structures associated with BW data sources (InfoCubes, ODS tables) to the inbound data files or use 3rd part tool to connect your flat files and other data sources and load data in BW. Several third party ETL products such as Acta, Infomatica, DataStage and others will have been certified to load data in BW. Q.What Is Ides? Ans: International Demonstration and Education System. A sample application provided for faster learning and implementation. Q.What Is Wf And Its Importance? Ans: Business Work Flow: Tool for automatic control and execution of cross-application processes. This involves coordinating the persons involved, the work steps required, the data, which needs to be processed (business objects). The main advantage is reduction in throughput times and the costs involved in managing business processes. Transparency and quality are enhanced by its use. Q.What Is Sap R/3? Ans: A third generation set of highly integrated software modules that performs common business function based on multinational leading practice. Takes care of any enterprise however diverse in operation, spread over the world. In R/3 system all the three servers like presentation, application server and database server are located at different system. Q.What Are Presentation, Application And Database Servers In Sap R/3? Ans: The application layer of an R/3 System is made up of the application servers and the message server. Application programs in an R/3 System are run on application servers. The application servers communicate with the presentation components, the database, and also with each other, using the message server. All the data are stored in a centralized server. This server is called database server. Q.What Should Be The Approach For Writing A Bdc Program? Ans: Convert the legacy system data to a flat file and convert flat file into internal table. Transfer the flat file into sap system called “sap data transfer". Call transaction(Write the program explicitly) or create sessions (sessions are created and processed, if success data will transfer). Q.Explain Open Sql Vs Native Sql? Ans: ABAP Native SQL allows you to include database-specific SQL statements in an ABAP program. Most ABAP programs containing database-specific SQL statements do not run with different databases. If different databases are involved, use Open SQL. To execute ABAP Native SQL in an ABAP program, use the statement EXEC. Open SQL (Subset of standard SQL statements), allows you to access all database tables available in the R/3 System, regardless of the manufacturer. To avoid conflicts between database tables and to keep ABAP programs independent from the database system used, SAP has generated its own set of SQL statements known as Open SQL. Q.What Are Datasets? Ans: The sequential files (processed on application server) are called datasets. They are used for file handling in SAP. Q.What Are Internal Tables Check Table, Value Table, And Transparent Table? Ans: Internal table: It is a standard data type object, which exists only during the runtime of the program. Check table: Check table will be at field level checking. Value table: Value table will be at domain level checking ex: scarr table is check table for carrid. Transparent table: - Exists with the same structure both in dictionary as well as in database exactly with the same data and fields. Q.What Are The Major Benefits Of Reporting With Bw Over R/3? Ans: Would it be sufficient just to Web-enable R/3 Reports? - Performance — Heavy reporting along with regular OLTP transactions can produce a lot of load both on the R/3 and the database (cpu, memory, disks, etc). Just take a look at the load put on your system during a month end, quarter end, or year-end — now imagine that occurring even more frequently. Data analysis — BW uses a Data Warehouse and OLAP concepts for storing and analyzing data, where R/3 was designed for transaction processing. With a lot of work you can get the same analysis out of R/3 but most likely would be easier from a BW. Q.How Can An Erp Such As Sap Help A Business Owner Learn More About How Business Operates? Ans: In order to use an ERP system, a business person must understand the business processes and how they work together from one functional area to the other. This knowledge gives the student a much deeper understanding of how a business operates. Using SAP as a tool to learn about ERP systems will require that the people understand the business processes and how they integrate. Q.What Is The Difference Between Olap And Data Mining? Ans: OLAP - On line Analytical processing is a reporting tool configured to understand your database schema, composition facts and dimensions . By simple point-n-clicking, a user can run any number of canned or user-designed reports without having to know anything of SQL or the schema. Because of that prior configuration, the OLAP engine “builds” and executes the appropriate SQL. Mining is to build the application to specifically look at detailed analyses, often algorithmic; even more often misappropriate called “reporting. Q.What Is "extended Star Schema" And How Did It Emerge? Ans: The Star Schema consists of the Dimension Tables and the Fact Table. The Master Data related tables are kept in separate tables, which has reference to the characteristics in the dimension table(s). These separate tables for master data is termed as the Extended Star Schema. Q.Define Meta Data, Master Data And Transaction Data? Ans: Meta Data: Data that describes the structure of data or MetaObjects is called Metadata. In other words data about data is known as Meta Data. Master Data: Master data is data that remains unchanged over a long period of time. It contains information that is always needed in the same way. Characteristics can bear master data in BW. With master data you are dealing with attributes, texts or hierarchies. Transaction data: Data relating to the day-to-day transactions is the Transaction data. Q.Name Some Drawbacks Of Sap ? Ans: Interfaces are huge problem, Determine where master data resides, Expensive, very complex, demands highly trained staff, lengthy implementation time. Q.What Is Bex? Ans: Bex stands for Business Explorer. Bex enables end user to locate reports, view reports, analyze information and can execute queries. The queries in workbook can be saved to there respective roles in the Bex browser. Bex has the following components: Bex Browser, Bex analyzer, Bex Map, Bex Web. Q.What Are Variables? Ans: Variables are parameters of a query that are set in the parameter query definition and are not filled with values until the queries are inserted into workbooks. There are different types of variables which are used in different application: Characteristics variables, Hierarchies and hierarchy node, Texts, Formulas, Processing types, User entry/Default type, Replacment Path. Q.What Is Awb? What Is Its Purpose? Ans: AWB stands for Administrator WorkBench. AWB is a tool for controlling, monitoring and maintaining all the processes connected with data staging and processing in the business information whearhousing. Q.What Is The Significance Of Ods In Biw? Ans: An ODS Object serves to store consolidated and debugged transaction data on a document level (atomic level). It describes a consolidated dataset from one or more InfoSources. This dataset can be analyzed with a BEx Query or InfoSet Query. The data of an ODS Object can be updated with a delta update into InfoCubes and/or other ODS Objects in the same system or across systems. In contrast to multi-dimensional data storage with InfoCubes, the data in ODS Objects is stored in transparent, flat database tables. Q.What Are The Different Types Of Source System? Ans: SAP R/3 Source Systems, SAP BW, Flat Files and External Systems. Q.What Is Extractor? Ans: Extractors is a data retrieval mechanisms in the SAP source system. Which can fill the extract structure of a data source with the data from the SAP source system datasets. The extractor may be able to supply data to more fields than exist in the extract structure. Q.What Is Internal And External Number Ranges? Ans: Internal Number Ranges: Doc. No will be provided by the system automatically in serial order allotting the next available progressive number. The number must be in numerical. External Number ranges: Doc. No will be given manually by the end user. System will not lock number automatically in this case. User can pick the number randomly. Number may be an alpha numeric. Q.What Is Residual Payment And Part Payment? Ans: Residual payment it clears original invoice with incoming amount and create new line item for remaining outstanding amount. Partial payment it leaves the original invoice amount and creates new line item for incoming amount. Q.What Is Open Line Item Management? What Do You Mean By Clearing Open Line Items? Ans: Open item management is further reconciliation function. OIM allows you to display the open and cleared items and amounts in an account. OIM should be used if an offsetting entry is made for every line item posted in the account. The a/c is reconciled and cleared against another account. Ex. Salary clearing account and GR/IR Clearing account. Q.What Are All The Segments In A Customer/vendor Master Record? Ans: Segments in Customer Segments in Vendor General Data segment. • General data segment. Company code segment. • Company code segment. Sales area segment. • Purchasing organization Segment. Q.What Is Country And Operational Chart Of Account? Why Do You Use Group Chart Of Account? Ans: Operational chart of account – Day to day activities It is mandatory. Country COA – It’s used for legal specific requirement of each country. It’s additional and optional. Group COA used for consolidation of Company codes. This is for group consolidation purpose. Q.What Does Field Status Group Assigned To A Gl Master Record Controls? Ans: It controls the account assignments that are made to the account. Specifically the field status group controls whether postings to cost centers, internal orders, profitability segments and so on are required, not allowed (suppressed), or optional. Q.What Are The Segments Of Gl Master Record? Ans: COA Segment A/C group. Nature of account . Short text. GL a/c long text . Trading partner. Group Account Number. Company code segment Account currency. Tax. Reconciliation a/c for a/c type. OIM,LID,FSG. Q.How Do You Control Field Status Of Gl Master Records And From Where Do You Control? Ans: Field status variant is maintained all FSGs. Q.What Is Reconciliation Account; Can You Directly Enter Documents In That A/c? Ans: When you post items to a subsidiary ledger, the system automatically posts the same data to the general ledger. Each subsidiary ledger has one or more reconciliation accounts in the general ledger. We can’t use reconciliation account for direct postings. Q.Can One Coa Be Assigned To Several Companies? Ans: yes. One COA can be assigned to several companies. Q.What Does Definition Of A Chart Of Account Contains? Ans: chart of account key. Maintenance language. Length of the GL Account Number. Controlling Integration. Group chart of accounts (Consolidation). Block Indicator. Q.What Is Chart Of Account And How Many Charts Of Accounts Can Be Assigned To A Company? Ans: Chart of account is a list of all G/L accounts used by one or several company codes. For each G/L account, the chart of accounts contains the account number, account name, and the information that controls how an account functions and how a G/L account is created in a Company code. You have to assign a chart of accounts to each company code. This chart of accounts is the Operating chart of accounts and is used for the daily postings in this company code. You have the following options when using multiple company codes. You can use the same chart of accounts for all company codes If the company codes all have the same requirements for the chart of accounts set up, assign all of the individual company codes to the same chart of accounts. This could be the case if all company codes are in the same country. In addition to the operating chart of accounts, you can use two additional charts of accounts If the individual company codes need different charts of accounts, you can assign up to two charts of accounts in addition to the operating chart of accounts. This could be the case if company codes lie in multiple countries. The use of different charts of accounts has no effect on the balance sheet and profit and loss statement. When creating the balance sheet or the profit and loss statement, you can choose whether to balance the company codes which use different charts of accounts together or separately. Q.What Is Posting Key And What Does It Control? Ans: These are special classification keys. Two character numerical key it controls the entry of line items. Posting key determines Account type, Debit/credit posting, Field status of transaction. Q.What Is Document Type, And What Does It Control? Examples? Ans: Document type is nothing vouchers containing line items. Several business transactions can be identified within a particular document type. It controls the document number ranges. It controls the Header part of document. IT controls the line item level of the document. Helps filing of physical document. Q.Where Do You Open And Close Periods? Ans: PPV is used to open and close the periods based on a/c types considering GL Accounts. Tr. Code. OB52. Q.How Many Normal And Special Periods Will Be There In Fiscal Year, Why Do You Use Special Periods? Ans: 12 Normal posting period and 4 special periods are in the fiscal year which can be used for posting tax and audit adjustments to a closed fiscal year. Q.Tell Me About Fi Organizational Structure? Ans: Client | Operating Concern | Controlling area1 Controlling Area 2 | Co. Code 1 Co. Code 2 | Bus area 1 Bus area2 Bus Area3 Bus Area 4 Q. In Gl Master We Have A Option "balance In Local Currency" And "account Currency". What Does It Mean? Ans: Account currency is that the GL account in which currency do you want to maintain. if you decided that you want maintain in company code currency, you can post any currency in that account. If not, you want to maintain separate currency for that GL then exchange rate difference will come because the conversion rate. Balance in local currency - some GL account can't be maintain on open item basis and can't in foreign currency like clearing account and discount account etc., in such case you can assign this indicator to show the balance in local currency. Q.How Skf Works .. Kindly Give Me T Codes Also? Ans: You create & plan SKF. Create using KK01 & PLAN the parameters of SKF in KP46. Q.For Stat. Key Figure What Is The Significance Of Sender & Receiver Cost Elements & Cost Centers? Ans: Stat key fig are not real account assignments. In simple traditional terms it is the base to allocate or define proportions with which the cost is allocated. SKFs are used to calculate the debit on a receiver object. These values can be used for assessing common costs which are used by all the other cost centers. Q. Where To Assign Activity Type In Cost Centers? Or How To Link Cost Centers & Activity Types? Ans: There is no direct assignment. You plan the output for a cost center first in kp26. Then you've to plan the value of that cost center which you budget for a period in kp06. Planned Activity expenditure / Planned Activity quantity gives you planned act rate which you can use to evaluate your activity confirmations in mfg orders. You can also define your own prices, but you have to run the price revaluation if you want to revaluate your actual activity prices. Q.What Is A Transaction? Ans: A transaction is dialog program that modify data objects in a consistent way. Q. What Are The Necessities Of A Dialog Program Must Complete? Ans: A dialog program should fulfill the following requirements. a user friendly user interface. Format and consistency checks for the data entered by the user. Easy alteration of input errors. Access to data by storing it in the data bases. Q.What Are The Fundamental Components Of Dialog Program? Ans: Screens (Dynpros). Each dialog in an SAP system is controlled by dynpros. A dynpros consists of a screen And its flow logic and controls just one dialog step. ABAP/4 module Pool. Each dynpro refers to exactly one ABAP/4 dialog program. Such a dialog program is also referred as module pool, since it consists of interactive modules. Q.What Is Pbo And Pai Events? Ans: PBO- Process Before Output-It find out the flow logic before displaying the screen. PAI-Process After Input-It find out the flow logic after the display of the screen and after receiving inputs from the User. Q.What Is Dynpro? What Are Its Components? Ans: A dynpro (Dynamic Program) consists of a screen and its flow logic and controls exactly one dialog steps. The different components of the dynpro are : Flow Logic: calls of the ABAP/4 modules for a screen . Screen layout: Positions of the text, fields, pushbuttons and so on for a screen Screen feature: Number of the screen, number of the subsequent screen and others Fields aspects: Definition of the attributes of the individual fields on a screen. Q.What Is A Abap/4 Module Pool? Ans: Each dynpro refers to exactly one ABAP/4 dialog program. Such a dialog program is also refer as a module pool, since it consists on interactive modules. Q.Can We Use Write Statements In Screen Fields If No Then How Is Data Relocate From Field Data To Screen Fields? Ans: We cannot write field data to the screen using the WRITE statement. The system instead shift data by evaluating screen fields names with ABAP/4 variable names. If both names are the same, it transfers screen fields values to ABAP/4 programs fields and Vice Versa. This happens instantly after displaying the screen. Q.Can We Make Use Of Flow Logic Control Key Words In Abap/4 And Vice-versa? Ans: The flow control of a dynpro consists of a few statements that syntactically reassemble ABAP/4 statements. However, We cannot use flow control keywords in ABAP/4 and vice-versa. Q.What Is Gui Standing? How To Create /edit Gui Status? Ans: A GUI status is a subset of the interface elements used for a definite screen.The status comprises those elements that are at present needed by the transaction.The GUI status for a transaction may be composed of the following elements: Title bar. Menu bar. Application tool bar Push buttons. To generate and edit GUI status and GUI title, we use the Menu Painter. Q.How Does The Interface Between The Dynpro And The Abap/4 Modules Takes Place? Ans: A transaction is a set of screens and ABAP/4 routines, controlled and carry out by a Dialog processor. The Dilaog processor processes screen after the screen, thus triggering the proper ABAP/4 processing of each screen. For each screen, the system process the flow logic that contains the equivalent ABAP/4 processing. The controls passes from screen flow logic to ABAP/4 code and back. Q.How Does The Dialog Handle User Requests? Ans: when an act is carried out, the system triggers the PROCESS AFTER INPUT event. The data passed includes field screen data filled by the user and a function code. A function code is a technical name that has been allocated in a screen Painter or Menu Painter to a menu entry, a push button, the ENTER key or a function Key of a screen. An internal work field(ok-code)in the PAI module weigh up the function code, and the suitable action is taken. Q. What Is To Be Defined For A Push Button Fields In The Screen Attributes? Ans: A function code has to be defined in the screen attributes for the push buttons in a screen. Q.How The Function Code Handles In Flow Logic? Ans: When the User selects a function in a transaction, the system duplicate the function code into a specifically designated work field called OK_CODE. This field is Global in ABAP/4 Module Pool. The OK _CODE can then be calculated in the corresponding PAI module. The function code is always passed in exactly the same way, regardless of whether it comes from a screen’s pushbutton, a menu option, function key or other GUI element. Q.What Controls The Screen Flow? Ans: The SET SCREEN and LEAVE SCREEN statements controls screen flow. Q.The Function Code At Presently Active Is Determined By What Variable? Ans: The function code presently active in a Program can be determined from the SY-UCOMM Variable. Q.What Are The "field" And "chain" Statements? Ans: The FIELD and CHAIN flow logic declaration let you Program Your own checks. FIELD and CHAIN tell the system which fields you are checking and Whether the System should carry out Checks in the flow logic or call an ABAP/4 Module. Q.What Is An "on Input Filed" Statements? Ans: ON INPUT: The ABAP/4 module is called only if a field have the Value other than the initial Value. This first Value is determined by the field’s Data Type: blanks for character Fields, Zeroes for numeric. If the user modify the Fields Value back to its initial value, ON INPUT does not trigger a call. Q.What Is An "on Request Field" Statement? Ans: ON REQUEST: The ABAP/4 Module is called only if the client has entered the value in the field value since the last screen display. The Value counts as changed Even if the User simply types in the value that was previously there. In common, the ON REQUEST condition is triggered through any Form of” MANUAL INPUT’. Q.What Does "sap Netweaver On Linux" Mean? Ans: SAP is the market leader of inter-enterprise software solutions with the world’s largest enterprise software customer base. SAP has more than 10 million licensed users, more than 20,000 installations in more than 100 countries and supports 28 different languages. More than half of the world’s top 500 companies use SAP software! SAP supports the mySAP Business Suite in a productive environment under Linux. This also includes the database server (IBM DB2/UDB, Informix, Oracle and SAP DB) as well as the application server and the frontend. You can run SAP on Linux in homogeneous and heterogeneous environments. The mySAP Business Suite is running upon the SAP NetWeaver, which includes components like the SAP Web Application Server or the SAP Enterprise Portal. Q.Interested In Offering Your Software To Sap Customers So They Can Enhance Functionality Of Their Sap Servers Running Linux? Ans: SAP is open to third party software and hardware products. As SAP only uses standard APIs provided by the Linux OS, third party software is usually transparent to us. Whereas we usually do not certify third party software, Linux Lab is open for joint development efforts. Q.What Role Does Sap Play In The Open Source Scene? Ans: We are supporting Open Source when it comes to Linux as an operating system or MaxDB (formerly Adabas/D or SAP DB) as a database. In fact, back in 1999, we were the first business software provider to support Linux as an operating system for running SAP solutions. We work closely with the Linux distributors and our partners to ensure our solutions work smoothly on Linux. Our main focus with SAP on Linux is helping our customers build the IT environment that is right for them. More and more customers are requesting help with SAP on Linux. And we are there to provide them with the high quality support they expect from SAP. Q.What Is The Sap Linuxlab? Ans: The SAP LinuxLab assists in the releasing of SAP software on Linux and drives the porting of SAP software to new platforms, like the Intel Itanium or IBM Power PC. Furthermore it helps other SAP departments with developing on and for the Linux platform and processes Linux-specific support problems - internal ones, as of external - or forwards them to the appropriate hardware or software partner. Currently, developers from Bull, Dell, Fujitsu-Siemens, HP, IBM, Intel, Novell/SUSE, RealTech, Red Hat, SAP, SUN and a number of temporary “guests” share the same rooms in the LinuxLab. Despite our hardware partners being competitors, the cooperation is excellent and we had a number of very successful projects. The LinuxLab also closely cooperates with (and is located directly next to) SAP’s Server Infrastructure department, which is responsible for the development of the SAP kernel, the basis layers on top of the native operating systems, which make SAP’s business applications platform independent. Q.Why Does Sap Support Linux? Ans: SAP’s goal is to be able to provide its customers the maximum of flexibility to create the best IT environment for their needs and be able to get the most value out of their business applications driving growth and profit. Openness, flexibility, and integrity of our products have always been part of our product strategy, putting customers in the position to decide what’s best for their IT environment. So the main reason is to offer you a free choice. Many SAP customers want to use Intel hardware and at the same time use their Unix know-how. Linux is growing with incredible speed and absolutely meets the quality standards of SAP. And thanks to the platform-independent SAP architecture, the port of the SAP kernel was fairly easy: none of the SAP business applications had to be modified. Another reason is the number of Unix operating systems SAP has to support. Especially when you try to get maximum performance out of your hardware resources, there are significant differences between the different Unix flavors. SAP has to maintain, test and support each possible combination of OS, database, hardware and mySAP release. With Intel moving to 64 bit there is a high probability of even more Unix flavors. A consolidation of these Unix derivatives would benefit both vendors and customers. From our point of view Linux has a realistic chance to become the unified Unix running on different hardware platforms. If Open Source continues like this, it is very important for a software company to adapt early to the new situation. We are very proud that SAP was the first software in the world that run mission-critical ERP operations on Linux. We expect Linux to be successful in low and high end installations and SAP, as Trusted Adviser, is helping customers to make the right decisions around SAP on Linux. Q.Explain The Architecture Of Firstlogic's Global Data Quality Connector For Sap Systems. Ans: Integrated at the BASIS/WAS layer, Firstlogic has developed Business Add-Ins (BAdI’s) that can be leveraged with a single instantiation; allowing for all SAP modules that utilize SAP’s Business Address Services framework to leverage the compelling advantages of Firstlogic technology. Furthermore, Firstlogic’s Information Quality Suite has been developed as a Remote Function Call (RFC) Server: the most common integration component of SAP software. Utilizing SAP’s RFC interface, SAP makes calls to Firstlogic technology for address check, updates, duplicate checks, and error tolerant searches. Q.How Does Firstlogic's Global Data Quality Connector For Sap Systems Work? Ans: Firstlogic’s Global Data Quality Connector is integrated at the BASIS layer and communicates with the SAP Applications via TCP/IP leveraging SAP’s Remote Function Call (RFC) interface. As users make postal validation inquiries in either batch or real-time, calls are made outside of the SAP Application to Firstlogic’s RFC Server. Once the customer’s address has been received by Firstlogic’s technology, our Information Quality Suite parses, standardizes, and corrects records according to configurable business rules and local postal authority standards. To ensure your customer view is optimized, Firstlogic’s technology catches duplicates at the point of entry; not after redundant information has infected your SAP Environment. Before any customer, vendor, or business partner is committed to the database, Firstlogic’s Information Quality suite will immediately inspect the data upon input. The connector scans the entire database for duplicates and assigns a similarity match score to potential duplicates. At that point, the user can determine whether the entered record is unique or a duplicate that should be eliminated from the system. In addition, convenient Error Tolerant Searching is available for prompt and precise address recognition. This improves transaction processing, saves time locating records, and optimizes system efficiency. Q.What Are The Benefits Of A Data Quality Solution? Ans: The biggest benefit is the confidence you have that your data is accurate. A data quality solution also allows you to: Manage customer data in different formats initially residing in separate databases Build and maintain successful relationships Better understand and service your customers Enhance knowledge management and business intelligence initiatives with reliable and accurate information Deliver clean, reliable data throughout your expanding information supply chains to all varieties of operational and analytical applications throughout your enterprise. Q.Will First Logic's Global Data Quality Connector For Sap Manage My International Data? Ans: Yes. Built on a global framework capable of validating address information for over 190 countries in a single processing pass, First logic’s Global Data Quality Connector for SAP allows you to identify country names, format and standardize addresses, correct missing address information, and assign postal codes for each respective country. Furthermore, First logic’s Easy IQ technology offers the ability to complete/populate addresses with minimal data or offer suggestions for possible matches. This easy address system is ideal in call centers or any transactional environment where data needs to be cleansed at the point-of-entry. The software improves real-time transactions for your call centers, sales, and support centers by providing accurate address data for your customer facing employees. How easy is it to maintain First logic’s Global Data Quality Connector for SAP after implementation? Ongoing maintenance should be minimal. Once the solution is implemented and configured, typically maintenance will only be required when you receive postal directory updates, upgrade to a new data quality release, or decide to change your application or business rules. Q.Can I Integrate A Data Quality Solution Within Other Software Applications? Ans: Data quality solutions can be fully integrated into CRM, ETL (Extract Transform Load), ERP, or BI solutions and have the advantage of being “seamless” to the end user - reducing the learning curve, as well as decreasing the implementation time frames. Your data process flow should not have to be modified to add a new data quality solution. Through integration and strategic partnerships you are assured that you are getting a best-of-breed solution. However, keep in mind it is not absolutely necessary for the solution to be fully integrated. First logic also provides tools that your organization can easily integrate on your own, and oftentimes stand-alone solutions may be more effective for specific projects. Q.Is Linux Supported As A Frontend Platform? Ans: The “SAPGUI for the Java Environment” can be downloaded from the SAP ftp servers. This project (formerly known as PlatinGUI - platform independent GUI) started in spring 1998 with the following objectives: build one GUI for all platforms (MacOS, Linux, OS/2, Win32, AIX, HP/UX, Solaris, Tru64 …) provide Control-Enabling with Java Beans create a new, flexible GUI-architecture support web browser integration. Q.Which Server Configurations Of Mysap Business Suite Will Be Supported On Linux? Ans: SAP supports mySAP Business Suite on Linux for database and application servers in homogeneous and heterogeneous environments. Please get in contact with your hardware partner for system sizing and similar. Q.Will A Customer Get Support When Recompiling The Linux Kernel Or Using 3rd-party Software That Modifies It? Ans: Usually there should be no need for recompiling the Linux kernel when using SAP software on Linux, since the supported Linux distributors are shipping optimized kernels for the respective hardware architectures with revised and tested drivers. Any modification to the tested environment would furthermore make it nearly impossible for the Linux distributor to track a problem down. The same applies to 3rd party software that modifies the Linux kernel and is distributed only in a closed, binary-only, way. Therefore the following can’t be supported: Recompiling the Linux kernel, with or without source modifications Loading of 3rd party binary Linux kernel modules which have not been shipped by the Linux distributors Loading of any unsupported Linux kernel modules Loading of any closed source drivers. Q.Which Databases Are Supported For Mysap Business Suite On Linux? Ans: Supported databases for mySAP Business Suite on Linux are IBM DB2/UDB, Informix, Oracle and SAP DB/MaxDB. Q.Which Releases Of Mysap Business Suite Are Supported On Linux? Ans: mySAP Business Suite on Linux is generally available for use in a productive environment starting with release 4.0B. Q.What Are The Main Reasons For Sap Customers Choosing Linux? Ans: Each SAP customer has a unique set of reasons for running SAP on Linux, depending on the very specific customer’s SAP scenario. Among many reasons customers decide for Linux as the operating system of choice, because they seek increased Flexibility , Scalability with different sized commodity, or even large former Unix or mainframe systems , Freedom of choice for technology vendors , Replacing larger Unix-based SAP servers. Q.Will Pricing Be Changed For Mysap Business Suite On Linux? Ans: Standard pricing for mySAP Business Suite applies also to mySAP Business Suite on Linux. Q.Where Can I Get Linux For Mysap Business Suite? Ans: Linux distributors like Debian, Mandrake, Red Hat or SUSE offer Linux together with a set of other software packages, installation routines, documentation and support. Whereas there is a de-facto standard for the Linux kernel itself, the distributions differ in other areas, especially in the administration area. Q.Where Can I Get The Mysap Business Suite On Linux? Ans: You can order the mySAP Business Suite on Linux just like mySAP software on any other platform. If you are a SAP customer already, there will be no additional charges. From Release 4.6 onwards, the mySAP Business Suite on Linux is part of the standard delivery. Q.Can I Execute User Exits? If Yes, How? Ans: Yes you can. after finding the user exit, you need to use, goto CMOD add your user-exit to your project. Then activate the FM which you require. Now go into that function module there will be a Include program wit name ZX*. Double click on it, it will ask to create an object, answer it Yes and then write your code in it. Q.How Do I Set A Flag For A Field In Any Table? Ans: Create a char field of length 1. for example field STAS-LKENZ is Deletion Indicator. It means that if the value in the field is ‘X’ then that record has been deleted. Q.What Are Table Buffers? Ans: Table buffers reside locally on each application server in the system. The data of buffered tables can thus be accessed directly from the buffer of the application server. This avoids the time-consuming process of accessing the database. Buffering is useful if table needs to be accessed more number of times in a program. Q.Can You Set Up Background Processing Using Call Transaction? Ans: Yes,Using No Screen Mode. Q.What Is The Use Of 'for All Entries'? Ans: To avoid nested select statements we use SELECT FOR ALL ENTRIES statement. If there are more than 10000 records SELECT FOR ALL ENTRIES is used. Performance wise SELECT FOR ALL ENTRIES is better to use. Q.What Is The Use Of 'table Index'? Ans: Index is used for faster access of data base tables. Q.When To Use Logical Database? Ans: Advantage of Logical databases: less coding is required to retrieve data compared to normal internal tables. Tables used LDB are in hierarchical structure. Q.What Is The Use Of 'outerjoin'? Ans: With the use of outer join you can join the tables even there is no entry in all the tables used in the view. In case of inner join there should be an entry in all the tables use in the view. Q.How Can I Copy A Standard Table To Make My Own Z_table. Ans: Go to transaction SE11. Then there is one option to copy table. Press that button. Enter the name of the standard table and in the Target table enter Z table name and press enter. Q.Which Transaction Code Can I Used To Analyze The Performance Of Abap Program. Ans: TCode AL21. Q.How Do We Debug Sapscript? Ans: Go to SE71 give lay set name, go to utilities select debugger mode on. Q.Can We Create Field Without Data Element And How? Ans: In SE11 one option is available above the fields strip. Data element/ direct type. Q.When Top Of The Page Event Is Triggered? Ans: After executing first write statement in start-of-selection event. Q.How Do You Get Output From Idoc? Ans: Data in IDOc is stored in segments, the output from Idoc is obtained by reading the data stored in its respective segments. Q.In Selection Screen I Have Three Fields, Plant Mat Number And Material Group. If I Input Plant How Do I Get The Mat Number And Material Group Based On Plant Dynamically? Ans: AT SELECTION-SCREEN ON VALUE-REQUEST FOR MATERIAL. CALL FUNCTION ‘F4IF_INT_TABLE_VALUE_REQUEST’ to get material and material group for the plant. Q.On Which Event We Can Validate The Input Fields In Module Programs? Ans: In PAI (Write field statement on field you want to validate, if you want to validate group of fields put in chain and End chain statement). Q.What Are Client Dependant Objects In Abap/sap? Ans: SAP Script layout, text element, and some DDIC objects. Q.How Data Is Stored In Cluster Table? Ans: Each field of cluster table behaves as tables which contains the number of entries. Q.Among "move" And "move Corresponding", Which Is Efficient One? Ans: I guess, ‘move corresponding’ is very efficient then ‘move’ statement. Because usually we use this stamtent for internal table fields only…so if we give move corresponding. Those fields only moving to other place (what ever you want). Q.What Is Pf-status? Ans: Pf status is used in interactive report for enhancing the functionality. If we go to se41, we can get menus, items and different function keys, which we are using for secondary list in interactive report. Q.What Is The Difference Between Clustered Tables And Pooled Tables? Ans: A pooled table is used to combine several logical tables in the ABAP/4 dictionary. Pooled tables are logical tables that must be assigned to a table pool when they are defined. Cluster table are logical tables that must be assigned to a table cluster when they are defined. Cluster table can be used to store control data they can also used to store temporary data or text such as documentation. Q.What Is The Table, Which Contain The Details Of All The Name Of The Programs And Forms? Ans: Table contains vertical and horizontal lines. We can store the data in table as blocks. We can scroll depends upon your wish. And these all are stored in database (data dictionary). Q.What Are The Difference Between Interactive And Drill Down Reports? Ans: ABAP/4 provides some interactive events on lists such as AT LINE-SELECTION (double click) or AT USER-COMMAND (pressing a button). You can use these events to move through layers of information about individual items in a list. Drill down report is nothing but interactive report…drilldown means above paragraph only. Q.Among The Call Transaction And Session Method, Which Is Faster? Ans: Call transaction is faster then session method. But usually we use session method in real time…because we can transfer large amount of data from internal table to database and if any errors in a session. Process will not complete until session get correct. Q.How Did You Test The Developed Objects? Ans: I was testing a developed object. There are two types of testing - Negative testing - Positive testing In negative testing we will give negative data in input and we check any errors occurs. In positive testing we will give positive data in input for checking errors. Q.What Is Runtime Analysis? Have You Used This? Ans: It’s checks program execution time in microseconds. When you go to se30.if you give desired program name in performance file. It will take you to below screen. You can get how much past is your program. Q.What Is Internal Recruitment ? Ans: Internal recruitment is search for internal applicants. when you integrate with personal development, you can use profile match up which help to search for resources internally. Also In recruitment it is represented by ‘P’ as Person and ‘AP” as external person. Q.Which Function Type Has To Be Used For Using "at Exit-command" ? Ans: To Use AT EXIT – COMMAND, We must allocate a function Type “E” to the applicable function in the MENU Painter OR Screen Painter. Q.What Is Difference Between Set Screen And Call Screen ? Ans: With SET SCREEN the present screen only spell out the next screen in the chain, control branches to this next screen as soon as the present screen has been processed. Return from next screen to present screen is not automatic. It does not interrupt processing of the current screen. If we want to branch to the next screen without finishing the current one, use LEAVE SCREEN. With CALL SCREEN, the existing (calling) chain is suspended, and a next screen (screen chain) is called.The called can then return to the suspended chain with the statement LEAVE SCREEN TO SCREEN 0. Sometime we might want to let an user call a pop up screen from the main application screen to let him enter secondary information. After they have completed their entries, the users should be able to close the popup and return directly to the place where they left off in the main screen. Here comes CALL SCREEN into picture.This statement lets us insert such a sequence into the current one. Q.What Assurance The Integration Of All Application Modules? Ans: The R/3 basis system assurance the incorporation of all application modules. The R/3 basis s/w provides the run time setting for the R/3 applications ensures optimal integration, defines a stable architectural frame for system augmentation, and contains the administration tools for the entire system.One of the main tasks of the basis system is to guarantee the portability of the complete system. Q.What Are The Central Crossing Points Of The R/3 System? Ans: Presentation Interface. Database Interface. Operating system Interface. Q.Which Interface Controls What Is Shown On The P.c.? Ans: Presentation Interface. Q.What Are The Functions Of Dispatcher? Ans: Equal allocation of transaction load to the work processes. Management of buffer areas in main memory. Integration of the presentation levels. Organization of communication activities. Q.What Is A Work Process? Ans: A work process is where individual dialog steps are in reality processed and the work is done. Each work process handles one type of request. Q.Name A Range Of Work Processes Of R/3 System? Ans: Dialog or Online (processes only one request at a time).Background (Started at a specific time)Update (primary or secondary)Enque (Lock mechanism).Spool (generated online or during back ground processing for printing). Q.Define Service (within R/3)? Ans: A service is a process or group of processes that execute a specific system function and often provide an application-programming interface for other processes to call. Q.What Are The Roll And Page Areas? Ans: Roll and page areas are SAP R/3 buffers used to store user contexts (process requests). The SAP dispatcher allocates process requests to work processes as they are queued in the roll and page areas.Paging area holds data from the application programs.Roll area holds data from preceding dialog steps and data that characterize the user. Q.What Components Of The R/e System Begin The Start Of Background Jobs At The Specified Time? Ans: The batch scheduler begins the start of background job. The dispatcher then sends this request to an accessible background work process for processing. Q.Define Instance. Ans: An instance is an administrative part in which components of an R/3 systems providing one or more services are assembled together. The services offered by an instance are ongoing and stopped at random. All components are parameterized using a joint instance profile. A central R/3 system consists of a single instance in which all-necessary SAP services are offered. Each instance uses separate buffer areas. Q.What Are R/3 Basis Configurations? Ans: A central system with centrally installed presentation software.Two-level client/server system with rolled out presentation software. Two-level client/server system. Presentation and Application run on the same computer. Three-level client / server system. Presentation, Application and database each run on separate computers. Q.What Is A Client In Sap Terminology? Ans: A S/W component that uses the service (offered by a s/w component) is name a Client. At the same time these clients may also be servers for other services. Q.What Is A Sap System? Ans: The union of all s/w components that are allocated to the same databases is called as a SAP system. Q.What Is The Means Of Communications Between R/3 And External Applications? Ans: The means of communication between R/2,R/3 and external applications is via the CPI-C handler or SAP Gateway, using the CPI-C Protocol. Q.What Is The Protocol Used By Sap Gateway Process? Ans: The SAP Gateway process communicates with the clients based on the TCP/IP Protocol. Q.What Is A Spool Request? Ans: Spool requests are produce during dialog or background processing and placed in the spool database with information about the printer and print format. The real data is places in the Tem Se (Temporary Sequential objects). Q.What Are Special Types Of Log Records? Ans: V1 and V2. V1 must be processed before V2. But, we can have more than one V2 logs. Q.What Are The Categories Of Update Requests? Ans: An update request can be separated into one primary (V1) and several Secondary update components (V2). Time-critical operations are placed in V1 component and those whose timing is less critical are placed in V2 components. If a V1 update fails, V2 components will not be processed. Q.Explain What A Transaction In Sap Terms. Ans: In SAP terms, a transaction is series of logically connected dialog steps. Q.Explain How Sap Gui Handles Output Screen For The User. Ans: The SAP front-end software can either run on the similar computer or on different computers provided for that purpose. User terminal input is established by the SAP terminal program SAP GUI, converted to SAP proprietary format and sent to the SAP dispatcher. The dispatcher organizes the information exchange between the SAP GUI's and the work processes. The dispatcher first places the processing request in request queues, which it then processes. The dispatcher dispatches the requests one after another, to the accessible work process. The actual processing takes place in the work process. When processing is done, the product of a work process is returned via the dispatcher to the SAP GUI. The SAP GUI read the received data and generates the output screen for the user. Q.What Is A Company Code And What Are The Basic Organizational Assignments To A Company Code? Ans: Company Code is a legal entity for which financial statements like Profit and Loss and Balance Sheets are generated. Plants are assigned to the company code, Purchasing organization is assigned to the company code, and Sales organization is assigned to the company code. Q.How Many Chart Of Accounts Can A Company Code Have? Ans: A single Company code can have only one Chart of Account assigned to it. The Chart of Accounts is nothing but the list of General Ledger Accounts. Q.What Are The Options In Sap When It Comes To Fiscal Years? Ans: Fiscal year is nothing but the way financial data is stored in the system. SAP provides you with the combination of 12 normal periods and also four special periods. These periods are stored in what is called the fiscal year variant. There are two types of Fiscal Year Variant Calendar Year – e.g. Jan-Dec Year Dependent Fiscal Year . Q.What Is A Year Dependent Fiscal Year Variant ? Ans: In a year dependent fiscal year variant the number of days in a month are not as per the calendar month. Let us take an example:- For the year 2005 the period January ends on 29th, Feb ends on 27th, March ends on 29. For the year 2006 January ends on 30th, Feb ends on 26th, March ends on 30th. This is applicable to many countries especially USA. Ever year this fiscal year variant needs to be configured in such a case. Q.How Does Posting Happen In Mm (materials Management) During Special Periods? Ans: There is no posting which happens from MM in special periods. Special periods are only applicable for the FI module. They are required for making any additional posting such as closing entries, provisions, which happen during quarter end or year end. Q.How Many Currencies Can Be Configured For A Company Code? Ans: A company code can have 3 currencies in total. They are local currency ie company code currency and 2 parallel currencies. This gives the company the flexibility to report in the different currencies. Q.Do You Require To Configure Additional Ledger For Parallel Currencies? Ans: Where only 2 currencies are configured (Company code currency and a parallel currency) there is no need for an additional ledger. In case the third parallel currency is also configured and if it is different than the second currency type, you would then need to configure additional ledger. Q.How Can The Default Settings Be Maintained For Cost Elements Per Company Code? Ans: The default settings can be maintained in transaction OKB9. Here we can specify for a company code, cost element which is the cost center to be defaulted or whether profitability segment is to be automatically derived. Further we can also maintain whether business area is mandatory or profit center is mandatory and can maintain the default business areas and profit centers. Q.Should Secondary Cost Elements Be Maintained In The 3keh Table? Ans: No. Since here we maintain only those accounts for which the value should flow from FI to PCA. Secondary cost elements are already defined in the controlling module which will reflect in the postings in PCA also. Q.What Are The Precautions To Be Taken While Maintaining The 3keh Table For Profit Center Accounting? Ans: You should not maintain the customer and vendor reconciliation accounts in the 3KEH table. Further you should also not maintain the special GL accounts in this table. Since we are transferring the customer and vendor balances to profit center module through separate month end programs. If the reconciliation’s accounts are maintained here it will result in double posting in the profit center module. Q.What Is The Basic Purpose Of Creating A Profit Center? Ans: The basic purpose of creating a Profit Center is to analyse the revenues and costs for a particular product line, or a plant or a business unit. Though you can generate balance sheets and profit and loss accounts per Profit Center still a profit center should basically be used as a tool only for internal reporting purposes. If legally one has to produce the Balance sheets and Profit and Loss Accounts for a profit center then it is advisable to create it as a company code instead of a profit center. Q.What Is The Difference Between Profitability Analysis And Profit Center Accounting? Ans: Profitability analysis lets you analyze the profitability of segments of your market according to products, customers, regions, division. It provides your sales, marketing, planning and management organizations with decision support from a market oriented view point. Profit center accounting lets you analyze profit and loss for profit centers. It makes it possible to evaluate different areas or units within your company. Profit center can be structured according to region, plants, functions or products (product ranges). Q.Is There Any Additional Configuration Required For Account Based Profitability Analysis As Compared To Costing Based Profitability Analysis? Ans: No. There are no special configurations required except for activating the account based profitability analysis while maintaining the operating concern. Q.What Is The Advantage Of Configuring Both The Type Of Profitability Analysis Together? Ans: The advantage of activating account based profitability analysis along with costing based PA is that you can easily reconcile costing based profitability analysis to account based profitability analysis, which means indirectly reconciling with Financial accounting. Q.What Is The Difference Between Account Based Profitability Analysis And Costing Based Profitability Analysis? Ans: Account based Profitability analysis is a form of Profitability analysis (PA) that uses accounts as its base and has an account based approach. It uses costs and revenue elements. Costing based Profitability Analysis is a form of profitability analysis that groups costs and revenues according to value fields and costing based valuation approaches. The cost and revenues are shown in value fields. Q.What Is The Basic Difference In Customizing In Profitability Analysis As Compared To Other Modules? Ans: In PA when we configure the system i.e. creating operating concern, maintain structures no customizing request is generated. The configuration needs to be transported through a different transaction called as KE3I. Q.What Is Characteristic Derivation In Profitability Analysis Module? Ans: Characteristic Derivation is usually used when you want to derive the characteristics . An example of this could be say you want to derive the first two characteristics of product hierarchy. In such cases you define characteristic derivation where you maintain the rules, which contain the table names of the product hierarchy fields and the number of characters to be extracted, and it also specifies the target characteristic field in PA. Q.What Are Characteristics And Value Fields? Ans: In the operating concern two things are basically defined a) Characteristics b) Value Fields Characteristics are nothing but those aspects on which we want to break down the profit logically such as customer, region product, product hierarchy, sales person etc. Value Fields are nothing but the values associated with these characteristics., Eg Sales, Raw Material Cost, Labour Cost, Overheads etc Once you define the characteristics and value fields these values are updated in the table. Q.What Happens When The Revaluation Is Done In Actual Costing Run For The Previous Period? Ans: When revaluation is performed in actual costing for the previous period the price control in the material master is changed from S to V and the periodic price is updated as the valuation price for the previous period. Q.What Happens In An Actual Costing Run? Ans: In actual costing run there is a process of single level price determination and multi level price determination. The production price difference variances are collected on the material ledger for each of the finished goods and semi finished goods. During single level price determination the price difference collected on a single finished product is allocated to consumption. This allocation to the consumption is not individually allocated to the good issues. In multi level price determination the price difference is allocated to individual goods issue. The price differences are passed on to the next level of consumption. The system calculates a weighted average price for the finished goods and semi finished goods. This weighted average price is called as the periodic unit price. Q.What Are The Steps To Be Taken Before You Execute An Actual Costing Run? Ans: The following are the steps to be taken: Execute all the allocation cycles in the cost center accounting module. Execute actual activity price calculation. Revalue all the production orders with the actual activity prices. The under or over absorbed cost on cost centers are passed on to the production order through this step of revaluation of production orders. Calculate overheads, do a variance calculation and finally settle the production order. Finally execute the actual costing run. Q. What Is The Configuration Setting To Be Done For Posting The Accrual In The Actual Costing Run? Ans: In transaction code OBYC select transaction key LKW and maintain the balance sheet account for accrual. Q. What Are The Options Available While Performing Revaluation In An Actual Costing Run? Ans: There are 2 options available:- Revaluation: You can revalue the finished goods stock Accrual : You can accrue the revaluation gain or loss without actually changing the price in the material master. Q. What Are The Problems Faced When A Material Ledger Is Activated? Ans: When a material ledger is activated it is imperative that actual costing run has to be done every month. Actual costing run needs to be done immediately after the new month roll over. After the actual costing run you cannot post any MM(Materials Management) entry to the previous period. Q. How Do You Go About Configuring Material Ledger? Ans: The following are the steps:- Activate Valuation Areas for Material Ledger. Assign Currency Types to Material Ledger Type. Assign Material Ledger Types to Valuation Area. Maintain Number Ranges for Material Ledger Documents. Activate Actual costing (whether activity update relevant for price determination). Activate Actual cost component split. Customizing settings in OBYC. Q. Why Does The System Not Calculate Variance For The 500 Kgs Which Has Been Delivered? Ans: In the product cost by order component the system does not calculate a variance for partially delivered stock on the production order. Whatever is the balance on the production order is considered as WIP. In the product cost by period component, system will calculate WIP as well as variance provided. Q. How Does Sap Calculate Work In Process (wip) In Product Cost By Order? Ans: The system first runs through all the production order for the month and checks for the status of each production order. If the status of the production order is REL (Released) or PREL (Partially released) and if costs are incurred for that order system calculates WIP for the production order. The system cancels the WIP for the production order when the status of the order becomes DLV (delivered) or TECO (Technically complete). Q. What Is The Basic Difference In Wip Calculation In Product Cost By Order And Product Cost By Period (repetitive Manufacturing)? Ans: Generally in product cost by order, WIP is calculated at actual costs and in product cost by period WIP is calculated at target costs. Q. In Period 1 There Is A Wip Posted Of 22000 Usd In Period 2 Some Further Goods Issue Are Done To The Extent Of 15000 Usd . How Will System Calculate Wip For Period 2? Ans: System will post a delta WIP of 15000 USD in period 2 Q. How Is It Possible To Apply 2 Different Overhead Rates For 2 Different Finished Goods? Ans: It is possible through overhead groups. You configure 2 overhead keys. Define rates for each of this overhead key. These two overhead keys is then assigned to the two overhead groups. These overhead groups are attached in the costing view of the finished goods material master Q. How Do You Prevent The System From Calculating The Cost Estimate For Raw And Packing Material When You Run A Standard Cost Estimate For The Finished Goods? Ans: To prevent the system from calculating cost estimates for raw and packing material, you need to select the “No costing” checkbox in the costing view of the material master. Q. When A Standard Cost Estimate Is Run For A Finished Good Does Sap Calculate Cost Estimate For Its Components Such As Raw And Packing Material? Ans: Yes. SAP calculates the cost estimate even for raw and packing material and stores it in the standard price field for information purposes. Q. What Are The Steps Involved Before You Run A Cost Estimate For A Split Valuated Material? Ans: The following are the steps:- Create procurement alternatives based on the valuation types for the material. Maintain Mixing ratios for the procurement alternatives. Q. What Is The Configuration Required For Additive Costs? Ans: To include additive costs in the material cost estimate you need to set the indicator “Incl. additive costs” for each valuation strategy in the valuation variant. Further you also need to set in the costing variant to include additive costs. Q. What Is The Meaning Of Additive Costs In Sap And Why Is It Required? Ans: Additive costs are used to add costs manually to a material cost estimate when it cannot be calculated by the system. Examples of such costs are freight charges, insurance costs and stock transfer costs. Q. What Are The Implications If The Operation Scrap Is Maintained In The Routing And If It Maintained In The Bom? Ans: If the operation scrap is maintained only in the routing, the costing lot size is reduced by this percentage. If the operation scrap is maintained in the BOM, the planned input (not the output quantity) is increased and any assembly scrap is reduced. Q. What Do You Mean By Operation Scrap And How Is It Maintained In Sap? Ans: Operation scrap is a scrap that is expected to occur during production. Operation scrap is used to reduce the planned input quantities in follow up operations and to calculate the precise amount of assembly scrap. Operation scrap can be maintained in % in the routing and in the BOM. Q. What Do You Mean By Component Scrap And How Is It Maintained In Sap? Ans: Component scrap is the scrap of a material that is expected to occur during production. When an assembly is produced with this component, the system has to increase the component quantity to enable to reach the required lot size. The component scrap can be entered in the BOM item or in the MRP 4 view of the material master. Q. How Are Scrap Variances Calculated? Ans: Scrap variance are calculated by valuating the scrap quantities with the amount of the actual costs less the planned scrap costs. Q. How Are Scrap Costs Shows In The Standard Cost Estimate? Ans: Scrap costs are assigned to the relevant cost component and can be shown separately for a material in the costed multilevel BOM. Q. What Do You Mean By Assembly Scrap And How Is It Maintained In Sap? Ans: Assembly scrap is scrap that is expected to occur during the production of a material which is used as an assembly. If a certain amount of scrap always occurs during the production of an assembly, the quantities and activities used must be increased by the system so that the required lot size can be produced. To increase the lot size of an assembly you can enter a percentage, flatrate assembly scrap in the MRP 1 view of the material master record. This assembly scrap is reflected in all the subordinate components. The system increases the quantity to be produced by the calculated scrap quantity. This increases both the materials consumed and the activities consumed and consequently the cost. Q. How Do You Configure That The Results Of The Standard Cost Estimate Are Updated In Other Fields Other Than The Standard Price? Ans: The price update in the material master is defined in Costing type. This costing type is attached to the costing variant. Q. Is It Possible To Update The Results Of The Standard Cost Estimate To Other Fields Such As Commercial Price, Tax Price Fields In The Accounting View? Ans: Yes. It is possible to update the standard cost estimate to other fields such as commercial price etc. in accounting view. Q. Why Is Preliminary Cost Estimate Required? Ans: The preliminary cost estimate is required for the following:- Confirm the actual activity quantities. Valuate work in process. Calculate production variances in variance calculation. Valuate the unplanned scrap in variance calculation. Q. What Is The Meaning Of Preliminary Cost Estimate For Product Cost Collector? Ans: Preliminary costing in the product cost by period component calculates the costs for the product cost collector. In repetitive manufacturing you can create cost estimate for specific production version. Q. What Is The Difference Between A Product Cost Collector And Production Order? Ans: Both of these are cost objects which collect production costs for manufactured product. Product cost collector is a single order created for a material. All the costs during the month for that material is debited to single product cost collector. No costing by lot size is required in case of product cost collector. The latter is where there are many production orders for a single material during the month. Costs are collected on each of this production order. Costing by lot size is the main requirement in case of production orders. Q. Is It Possible To Calculate Standard Cost Estimate For A Past Date? Ans: No. It is not possible to calculate standard cost estimate for a past date Q. How Do You Got About Defining Co-product Functionality In Repetitive Manufacturing? Ans: In the Repetitive manufacturing you need to use the Costing BOM for the other co-product. Through arithmetical calculation you need to maintain the quantities in the costing BOM. This co-product will be shown as a negative item in the leading co-product. Q. Is It Possible To Use Standard Sap Co-product Functionality In Repetitive Manufacturing? Ans: No. It is not possible to use the Standard Co-product functionality in repetitive manufacturing. Q. How Do You Define A Co-product In Sap? Ans: A Co-product (primary product or by-product) is indicated by a tick in the costing view of the material master. In the BOM all the primary products are represented as an item with negative quantity. A primary product is also indicated as a co-product in the BOM of the leading coproduct. For primary products the costs are calculated using the apportionment method, while for by-products the net realizable value method applies. Q. How Do You Calculate The Cost For A By-product In Sap? Ans: The cost for the By-product is the net realizable value. This is manually maintained in the system for the by-product through transaction code MR21 Price change. Q. There Are Result Analysis Categories In Wip (work In Process). What Do You Mean By The Result Analysis Category Reserves For Unrealized Costs? Ans: If you are calculating the work in process at actual costs, the system will create reserves for unrealized costs if the credit for the production order based on goods receipts is greater than the debit of the order with actual costs incurred. The Result analysis category RUCR (Reserves for unrealized cost) would need to be maintained. Normally this is not maintained in most of the companies. Q. Lets Say For A Product There Exists Three Production Versions. Explain The Process How You Would Go About Creating A Mixed Cost Estimate? Ans: The process of creating a Mixed cost estimate would be as follows:- Create procurement alternatives for each of the production version. Define Mixing ratios for the procurement alternatives. Select the configured quantity structure type and execute a material cost estimate based on the costing version. Q. What Configuration Needs To Done For Using Mixed Costing? Ans: Quantity Structure type for mixed costing must be configured. Here we specify the time dependency of the structure type . The following options exist You have no time dependency. It is based on fiscal year. It is based on period. This quantity structure type is then assigned to the costing version. Q. How Do Primary Costs Get Picked Up From Cost Center Into The Cost Component Structure? Ans: This is possible when you do a plan activity price calculation from SAP. The primary cost component structure is assigned to the plan version 0 in Controlling Q. How Does Sap Go About Costing A Product Having Multiple Bill Of Materials Within It? Ans: SAP first costs the lowest level product, arrives at the cost and then goes and cost the next highest level and finally arrives at the cost of the final product. Q. How Can You Default Certain Items While Creation Of Internal Order Master Data? Ans: You can do so by creating a model order and then update the fields which you want to default in this model order. Finally attach this model order in the internal order type in the field reference order. Once the above is done whenever you create an internal order for this order type the field entries will get copied from the model order. Q. You Want To Revalue The Production Orders Using Actual Activity Prices. Is There Any Configuration Setting? Ans: Yes. There is a configuration setting to be done. Q. Where Is The Configuration Setting To Be Done For Carrying Out Revaluation Of Planned Activity rices In Various Cost Objects? Ans: The configuration setting is to be done in the cost center accounting version maintenance for fiscal year. This has to be maintained for version 0. You need to select revalue option either using own business transaction or original business transaction. Q.Explain The Process Of Calculating The Planned Activity Output Through Long Term Planning? Ans: In Long term planning process the planned production quantities are entered for the planning year in a particular scenario. The Long term planning is executed for the scenario. This generates the planned activity requirements taking the activity quantities from the routing and multiplying with the planned production. The activity requirements are then transferred to the controlling module as scheduled activity quantities. Thereafter you execute a plan activity reconciliation which will reconcile the schedule activity and the activity you have planned manually. The reconciliation program updates the scheduled activity quantity as the planned activity in the controlling module. Q.Is It Possible To Calculate The Planned Activity Output Through System? Ans: Yes. It is possible to calculate the planned activity output through system by using Long term Planning process in PP module. Q.What Is Required To Be Done If Activity Price Is To Be Shown Both Fixed And Variable? Ans: In this case you need to plan both activity independent cost which are shown as fixed costs and activity dependent costs which are shown as variable costs. Q.What Is The Difference Between Distribution And Assessment? Ans: Distribution uses the original cost element for allocating cost to the sender cost center. Thus on the receiving cost center we can see the original cost element from the sender cost center. Distribution only allocates primary cost. Assessment uses assessment cost element No 43 defined above to allocate cost. Thus various costs are summarized under a single assessment cost element. In receiver cost center the original cost breakup from sender is not available. Assessment allocates both primary as well as secondary cost. Q.Is A Cost Center Group? Ans: In a similar line the cost center group is also a group of cost centers which help one to track and control the cost of a department more effectively. You can make as many number of cost centers as you feel necessary by combining various logical cost centers Infact you can use various combinations of cost center group with the cost element group to track and control your costs per department or across departments. Q.What Is A Cost Element Group? Ans: Cost element group is nothing but a group of cost elements which help one to track and control cost more effectively. You can make as many number of cost element groups as you feel necessary by combining various logical cost elements. Q.How Is Cost Center Accounting Related To Profit Center? Ans: In the master data of the Cost Center there is a provision to enter the profit center. This way all costs which flow to the cost center are also captured in the profit center. Cost centers are basically created to capture costs e.g. admin cost center, canteen cost center etc. Profit centers are created to capture cost and revenue for a particular plant, business unit or product line. Q.Explain The Organizational Assignment In The Controlling Module? Ans: Company codes are assigned to the controlling area. A controlling area is assigned to the operating concern. Controlling Area is the umbrella under which all controlling activities of Cost Center Accounting, Product costing, Profitability Analysis and Profit Center are stored. Operating Concern is the highest node in Profitability Analysis. Q.What Is A Account Group And Where Is It Used? Ans: An Account group controls the data that needs to be entered at the time of creation of a master record. Account groups exist for the definition of a GL account, Vendor and Customer master. It basically controls the fields which pop up during master data creation in SAP. Q.What Is The Purpose Of A "document Type" In Sap? Ans: A Document type is specified at the Header level during transaction entry and serves the following purposes: It defines the Number range for documents. It controls the type of accounts that can be posted to eg Assets, Vendor, Customer, Normal GL account. Document type to be used for reversal of entries. Whether it can be used only for Batch input sessions. Document Type is created for differentiating business transactions. Eg Vendor Invoice, Credit Memo, Accrual Entries, Customer Invoice. It is a two digit character. Q.What Is A Financial Statement Version? Ans: A FSV (Financial Statement Version) is a reporting tool and can be used to depict the manner in which the financial accounts like Profit and Loss Account and Balance Sheet needs to be extracted from SAP. It is freely definable and multiple FSV's can be defined for generating the output for various external agencies like Banks and other Statutory authorities. Q.How Are Input And Output Taxes Taken Care Of In Sap? Ans: A tax procedure is defined for each country and tax codes are defined within this. There is flexibility to either expense out the Tax amounts or Capitalize the same to Stocks. Q.What Are Validations And Substitutions? Ans: Validations/Substitutions in SAP are defined for each functional area e.g. FI-GL, Assets, Controlling etc at the following levels Document level Line item level These need to be specifically activated and setting them up are complex and done only when it is really needed. Often help of the technical team is taken to do that. Q.Is It Possible To Maintain Plant Wise Different Gl Codes? Ans: Yes. To be able to do so the valuation group code should be activated. The valuation grouping code is maintained per plant and is configured in the MM module. Account codes should be maintained per valuation grouping code after doing this configuration. Q.Is Business Area At Company Code Level? Ans: No. Business area is at client level. What this means is that other company codes can also post to the same business area. Q.What Are The Problems Faced When A Business Area Is Configured? Ans: The problem of splitting of account balance is more pertinent in case of tax accounts. Q.Which Is The Default Exchange Rate Type Which Is Picked Up For All Sap Transactions? Ans: The default exchange rate type picked up for all SAP transactions is M (average rate). Q.Is It Possible To Configure The System To Pick Up A Different Exchange Rate Type For A Particular Transaction? Ans: Yes it is possible. In the document type definition of GL, you need to attach a different exchange rate type. Q.What Are The Master Data Pre-requisites For Document Clearing? Ans: The Gl Account must be managed as an ‘open item management’ . This checkbox is there in the General Ledger Master Record called Open Item Management. It helps you to manage your accounts in terms of cleared and uncleared items. A typical example would be GR/IR Account in SAP (Goods Received/Invoice Received Account). Q.How Many Numbers Of Line Items In One Single Entry You Can Have? Ans: The number of line items in one document you can accommodate is 999 lines. Q.A Finance Document Usually Has An Assignment Field. This Field Automatically Gets Populated During Data Entry. Where Does It Get Its Value? Ans: This value comes from the Sort key entered in the Gl master record. Q.How Do You Maintain The Number Range In Production Environment? Do You Directly Create It In The Production Box Or Do You Do It By Means Of Transport? Ans: Number range is to be created in the production client. You can transport it also by way of request but creating in the production client is more advisable. Q.In Customizing "company Code Productive" Means What? What Does It Denote? Ans: Once the company code is live(real time transactions have started) this check box helps prevents deletion of many programs accidentally. This check box is activated just before go live. Q.What Is Done By Gr/ir Regrouping Program? Ans: The balance in a GR/IR account is basically because of 2 main types of transactions:- Goods delivered but invoice not received: Here the Goods receipt is made but no invoice has yet been received from the vendor. In such a scenario GR/IR account will have a credit balance. Invoiced received but goods not delivered : Here the Invoice is received from the vendor and accounted for, but goods have not been received. In such a scenario GR/IR account will have a debit balance. The GR/IR account would contain the net value of the above two types of transactions. The GR/IR regrouping program analyses the above transactions and regroups them to the correct adjustment account. The balance on account of first transactions will be regrouped to another liability account and the balance on account of second transactions will be regrouped to an asset account. Q.What Are The Functionalities Available In The Financial Statement Version? Ans: In the financial statement version the most important functionality available is the debit credit shift. This is more important in case of Bank overdraft accounts which can have a debit balance or a credit balance. Thus in case of a debit balance you would require the overdraft account to be shown on the Asset side. In case of credit balance you would require the account to be shown on the Liability side. Q.Is It Possible To Print The Financial Statement Version On A Sapscript Form? Ans: Yes. It is possible to print the financial statement version on a SAPscript form. Q.Is It Possible To Generate A Financial Statement Form Automatically? Ans: Yes. It is possible to generate a form automatically. Q.Is It Possible To Keep The Fi Posting Period Open Only For Certain Gl Codes? Ans: Yes. It is possible to keep open the FI posting period only for certain GL codes. Q.How Do You Keep The Fi Posting Period Open Only For Certain Gl Codes? Ans: In transaction code OB52 click on new entries and maintain an interval or a single GL code for the account type S with the posting period variant. If the GL codes are not in sequence then you need to maintain further entries for the posting period variant and account type S. Q.Can Posting Period Variant Be Assigned To More Than 1 Company Code? Ans: Yes. Posting period variant can be assigned to more than one company code. Q.Where Do You Attach The Check Payment Form? Ans: It is attached to the payment method per company code. Q.Where Are Payment Terms For Customer Master Maintained? Ans: Payment terms for customer master can be maintained at two places i.e. in the accounting view and the sales view of the vendor master record. Q.Which Is The Payment Term Which Actually Gets Defaulted When The Transaction Is Posted For The Customer (accounting View Or The Sales View)? Ans: The payment term in the accounting view of the customer master comes into picture if the transaction originates from the FI module. If an FI invoice is posted (FB70) to the customer, then the payment terms is defaulted from the accounting view of the customer master. The payment term in the sales view of the customer master comes into picture if the transaction originates from the SD module. A sales order is created in the SD module. The payment terms are defaulted in the sales order from the sales view of the customer master. Q.Where Are Payment Terms For Vendor Master Maintained? Ans: Payment terms for Vendor master can be maintained at two places i.e. in the accounting view and the purchasing view Q.Can We Change The Reconciliation Account In The Vendor Master? Ans: Yes. Reconciliation account can be changed in the vendor master provided that the authority to change has been configured. Normally we should not change the reconciliation account. Q.What Is The Impact On The Old Balance When The Reconciliation Account In The Vendor Master Is Changed? Ans: Any change you make to the reconciliation account is prospective and not retrospective. The old items and balances do not reflect the new account only the new transactions reflect the account. Q.There Is An Advance Given By The Customer Which Lies In A Special Gl Account Indicator A. Will This Advance Amount Be Considered For Credit Check? Ans: It depends on the configuration setting in the special GL indicator A. If the “Relevant to credit limit” indicator is switched on in the Special GL indicator A the advances will be relevant for credit check, otherwise it will not be relevant. Q.In Payment Term Configuration What Are The Options Available For Setting A Default Baseline Date? Ans: There are 4 options available:- No default. Posting date. Document date. Entry date. Q.What Is Generally Configured In The Payment Term As A Default For Baseline Date? Ans: Generally document date is configured in the payment term as a default for base line date. Q.How Is Bank Reconciliation Handled In Sap? Ans: The bank reco typically follows the below procedure: First, the payment made to a Vendor is posted to an interim bank clearing account. Subsequently, while performing reconciliation, an entry is posted to the Main Bank account. You can do bank reconciliation either manually or electronically. Q.How Do You Configure Check Deposit? Ans: The following are the steps for configuring check deposit:- Step1: Create account symbols for the main bank and incoming check account. Step2: Assign accounts to account symbols. Step3: Create keys for posting rules. Step4: Define posting rules. Step5: Create business transactions and assign posting rule. Step6: Define variant for check deposit. Q.What Is The Clearing Basis For Check Deposit? Ans: In the variant for check deposit we need to set up the following a) fields document number ( which is the invoice number). b) amount. c) Short description of the customer. The document number and the invoice amount acts as the clearing basis. Q.How Do You Configure Manual Bank Statement? Ans: The following are the steps for configuring manual bank statement:- Step1: Create account symbols for the main bank and the sub accounts. Step2: Assign accounts to account symbols. Step3: Create keys for posting rules. Step4: Define posting rules. Step5: Create business transaction and assign posting rule. Step6: Define variant for Manual Bank statement. Q.How Do You Configure Electronic Bank Statement? Ans: The steps for Electronic Bank Statement are the same except for couple of more additional steps which you will see down below. Step1: Create account symbols for the main bank and the sub accounts. Step2: Assign accounts to account symbols. Step3: Create keys for posting rules. Step4: Define posting rules. Step5: Create transaction type. Step6: Assign external transaction type to posting rules. Step7: Assign Bank accounts to Transaction types. Q.What Are The Organizational Assignments In Asset Accounting? Ans: Chart of depreciation is the highest node in Asset Accounting and this is assigned to the company code. Under the Chart of depreciation all the depreciation calculations are stored. Q.How Can You Link Customer And Vendor Master Records And What Is The Purpose Of Doing So ? Ans: On the customer master there is a field “vendor” and likewise on the vendor master there is a field “customer”. By entering these master data numbers, a link can be created between the AP/AR subledgers for use in the payment program, dunning routine and the clearing of open items. For example in the payment program, if a specific business partner is your vendor but also your customer, linking their master records together will allow the open AR invoices to be offset against the outstanding AP invoices. Q.What Are Terms Of Payments And Where Are They Stored ? Ans: Payment terms are created in configuration and determine the payment due date for customer/vendor invoices. They are stored on the customer/vendor master record and are pulled through onto the customer/ vendor invoice postings. The due date derived via the payment can be changed on each individual invoice if required. Q.What Is Meant By A "baseline Date" In Sap Ar And Ap ? Ans: The baseline date is the date from which the payment terms (specified in IMG transaction OBB) apply Usually this is the document date on the invoice but can also be the date of entry or posting date from the ledger. Q.What Are One-time Vendors ? Ans: In certain industries (especially where there are a high volume of cash transactions), it is not practical to create new master records for every vendor trading partner. One-time vendors allow for a dummy vendor code to be used on invoice entry and the information which is normally stored in the vendor master (payment terms, address etc) , is keyed on the invoice itself. Q.Name The Standard Stages Of The Sap Payment Run? Ans: The following steps are usually performed during the payment run Entering of parameters (company codes, payment methods, vendor accounts etc). Proposal Scheduling – the system proposes list of invoices to be paid. Payment booking – the booking of the actual payments into the ledger. Printing of payment forms (cheques etc). Variations on the above may be found in different SAP customers, but the interviewer will be looking for the basis steps above. Q.Explain Briefly How You Can Import Electronic Bank Statements Into Sap? Ans: A text file is received from the bank which is then uploaded into the SAP system. The file contains details of the company’s bank movements e.g. cheques, bank interest, bank charges, cash receipts etc. Depending on the system configuration SAP will attempt to book these transactions automatically to the correct accounts to avoid the need for manual entries by SAP users. Any postings which the system cannot derive automatically can be booked through “post-processing”. Q.What Is "dunning" In Sap ? Ans: Dunning is the process by which payment chasing letters are issued to customers. SAP can determine which customers should receive the letters and for which overdue items. Different letters can be printed in SAP depending on how far overdue the payment is from a simple reminder to a legal letter. The dunning level on the customer master indicates which letter has been issued to the customer. Q.What Are "reason Codes" Used For In The Accounts Receivable Module And What Are The Factors To Be Considered In Their Configuration? Ans: Reason codes are tags which can be assigned to explain under/overpayments during the allocation of incoming customer payments. They should not be confused with ‘void reason codes’ used when outgoing checks are generated. During configuration the following are determined Whether the items booked with these reason codes are to be flagged as disputed items for the purposes of credit management (disputed items do not increase a customer credit exposure. The type of correspondence (if any) to be generated for this reason code as a result of the under/over payment. Whether a separate line item should be created to charge off the payment differences to a separate G/L account. Q.What Are Exchange Rate "factors" ? Ans: Exchange Rate factors are the relationships between one currency and another to which an exchange rate is applied. For example you may define the Indonesia Rupiah to US$ factor as 10000 : 1. Combined with an exchange rate of 0.95 this would equate to 9500 IDR to 1 USD. Q.What Is Document Parking And Why Is It Important When Consideration Internal Control Procedures And "segregation Of Duties" ? Ans: Parking is a SAP term which means a posting (AP/AR/GL) can be temporarily saved (possibly with incomplete information) without hitting the affected ledger(s). A separate person can then release the posting to the ledger when required. This is useful for example if junior staff are to initially enter the invoices, before their supervisor checks it and books it to the ledger. Another popular use is when entering GL journals with many hundreds of line items. The document can be partsaved allowing for completion at a later date. Q.Explain The Document Currency (wrbtr) And Local Currency Fields (dmbtr) When Posting A Document In Sap Fi? Ans: On the document header, the currency key is entered. If this is different from the entity currency (or local currency), an equivalent amount in local currency is calculated automatically by the system and stored in the field “local currency”. It is possible however to overwrite the system proposed value in this field manually. If the local amount is manually overwritten, and the difference between the implied exchange rate is sufficiently different to the rate used by the system, a warning or error message is displayed (depending on system configuration). Q.What Are Fi Substitution Rules ? Ans: Defined in configuration they are similar to the FI validation rules above. Substitution rules allow field values to be replaced when certain pre-requisites conditions are met. QDuring Document Postings, Under What Circumstances Would Sap Display The Following Warning / Error Message: "calculated Rate Deviates From Document Header Rate By X%"? Ans: This occurs when the exchange rate in the document header (either entered by the user or derived from the exchange rate table) differs by a larger amount than that specified as the maximum tolerance. (The message can changed to be either an error or a warning). Q.When Entering Foreign Currency Fi Transactions Describe The Various Ways In Which The Exchange Rate Is Derived By Sap? Ans: The exchange rate can be entered via either:- Directly on the document header. Derived from the exchange rate table (by leaving exchange rate blank). Indirectly, by entering the explicit local currency amount so the system is forced to use a specific exchange rate. Q.What Are Fi Validation Rules ? Ans: Validation rules (configured via transaction OB28) enforce certain conditions when FI postings are made. Validation rules comprise:- A prerequisite event that has to occur for the validation check to take place. The check itself. The output message that is to be displayed (you can choose between a warning or error message). Q.Explain The Purpose Of The Account Type Field In The Gl Master Record? Ans: At year end P&L accounts are cleared down to the retained earnings balance sheet account. This field contains an indicator which is linked (in the IMG transaction OB53) to the specific GL account use in this clear down. Q.What Is The Difference Between The Chart Of Account View And Company Code View When Maintaining A Gl Account ? Ans: There are two screens which have to be maintained for each new GL account. The first is at ‘chart of account’ level (transaction FSP0) and contains the information used by all company codes using this chart of accounts such as description, group account number etc. Each company code using this chart will then add its own company code view (via transaction code FSS0) which contains localized data specific to that entity e.g. field status group, alternative account number etc. The chart of accounts screen must be maintained before the local company code screens. Q.What Is A Sort Key And What Is It Used For? Ans: Sort keys are stored in customer, vendor and GL master records. They determine what value is populated in the ‘assignment’ field in the document line items posted. There are several standard entries in a pre-delivered SAP system and additional entries can be configured if required. A very common use for sort key 014 Purchase Order number for example, is to allow the GR/IR clearing GL account to be cleared automatically. For FI/CO jobs in a logistics environment this is a common question. Q.What Are Fiscal Year Variants And How Are Fiscal Periods Opened And Closed? Ans: Fiscal year variants (FSV’s) are assigned to a company code via transaction OBY6. They determine the financial reporting periods of an entity e.g. 13 4-weekly periods, calendar months, 5-5-4 reporting etc. During month end the current fiscal reporting period will be and the next month opened. Its possible to open and close specific ledgers e.g. AP, AR, GL and even sets of accounts within those ledgers. This way its possible to, for example, close all GL accounts and leave only the month end adjustment accounts open for posting. Q.What Are The Special Periods 13,14,15,16 And What Are They Used For? Ans: When you define the fiscal year variant you can choose to define additional special periods. These can be used for example for the posting of year end adjustments, auditors adjustments etc. Periods 1-12 can be closed and periods 13-16 left open during year end closing. Q.What Are Recurring Entries And Why Are They Used? Ans: Recurring entries (setup in FBD1 ) can eliminate the need for the manual posting of accounting documents which do not change from month to month. Q.Explain How Foreign Currency Revaluation Works In Sap R/3 Fi? Ans: Over time the local currency equivalent of foreign currency amounts will fluctuate according to exchange rate movements. Usually at month end, there is a requirement to restate these amounts using the prevailing month end exchange rates. SAP can revalue foreign currency GL account balances as well as outstanding customer and vendor open item balances. In SAP configuration, you define the balance sheet adjustment account and which accounts the realized gain/loss should be booked. A batch input session is created to automatically post the required adjustments. Q.Describe Three Ways Of Disposing Of An Asset From A Company Code In Sap R/3 Ans: An existing asset can be scrapped (transaction ABAVN), transferred to another company code (ABUMN), sold to a customer account in the accounts receivable module (F-92), sold with revenue but the revenue is booked to a GL account (ABAON). Q.What Are Account Assignment Models ? Ans: AAM’s are blocks of document line items that can be used repeatedly to prevent manual re-entry. Which fields are included in the AAM layout can be configured using O7E3. Q.What Is A "value Field" In The Co-pa Module ? Ans: Value fields are number/value related fields in profitability analysis such as quantity, sales revenue, discount value etc. Q.What Is A "characteristic Field" In The Co-pa Module ? Ans: Characteristics are analytical information fields used in CO-PA. Typical examples include customer number, brand, distribution channel etc. Q.What Is The Difference Between "costing Based" (cb) And "account Based" (ab) Co-pa ? Ans: This is an incredibly popular question for any positions with a COPA component. The interviewer will be looking for some of the following:- AB can easily be reconciled with FI at account level through the use of cost elements. CB can only be reconciled at account group level (such as revenues, sales deductions etc) as values are stored in “value fields” as opposed to accounts. In CB data is stored by posting periods and weeks. In AB storage is only by periods. In CB transactions can be stored in operating concern currency and company code currency. In AB transactions are stored in controlling area currency, company code currency and transaction currency. In CB you can create cross controlling area evaluations or cross controlling area plans. In AB you cannot as the chart of accounts may differ. In CB the cost of good sales (COGS) are updated via material price valuations. Stock change values can be transferred to CB COPA during billing. Timing differences can occur if the goods issue and billing documents are in different posting periods. In AB the value posted in the stock change is posted simultaneously to COPA. Q.What Is An Operating Concern And What Is Its Relationship With A Controlling Area In Co ? Ans: The operating concern is the main organizational unit in Profitability Analysis. It’s structure depends on the configuration setup of characteristics and value fields. It is assigned to a controlling area on a one to may basis i.e. one controlling area may be assigned to only one operating concern, one operating concern can be assigned to many controlling areas. Q.What Are Statistical Internal Orders? Ans: Statistical real internal orders are dummy cost objects used for analysis and reporting purposes. They must be posted to in conjunction with a real cost object such as a cost center. For example for employees we define statistical internal orders and for departments we define cost centers. Travel expense invoices can then be booked to specific cost centers but analysis can also be done at employee level by looking at the statistical orders. Statistical internal orders cannot be settled. Q.Name Some Settlement Receivers For Co Internal Orders? Ans: Typically CO Internal Order are settled to:- Other internal orders. Fixed assets (including assets under constructions). GL Accounts. Cost Centres. Q.What Are The Performances Issue To Be In Mind When Configuring Profitability Analysis (copa) ? Ans: Sometimes COPA reporting performance is severely affected by poor initial setup. Anyone involved in a full COPA project lifecycle in a retail or manufacturing environment will have come across such issues hence the reason the interviewer is asking the question. The most important thing. Q.Explain Some Of The Controls Setup During The Configuration Of Internal Order Types In The Co Module? Ans: The following settings are made during the configuration of order types (transaction KOT2_OPA) Number ranges assigned to the order master on creation. Planning and budgeting profiles. Status profiles. Order layouts. Q.What Is The Co Reconciliation Ledger And When Would You Typically Use It ? Ans: The reconciliation ledger effectively highlights differences by account across the FI and CO modules. A report is produced by the RL program, identifying where transactions have been booked across entities in controlling that would impact the external reporting produced from the FI module. The RL program can then either post automatic corrections or you can choose to post manual corrections based on the information in the RL report. Q.What Are Statistical Key Figures In Co ? Ans: SKF’s are statistical (or information values) used in cost allocations such as assessments and distributions. For example we may have an SKF for ‘head count per department’. When utility costs are allocated across various departments we could perform the percentage allocation based on the ‘head count’ SKF. Q.How Do You Take The Balances Onto Fixed Asset Reconciliation Accounts During Data Take-on ? Ans: Normally you cannot post direct to reconciliation accounts. However there is a configuration transaction OAK5/ OAMK which can be used to temporarily remove the reconciliation flags to allow the balances to be journaled onto the fixed asset reconciliation accounts. Q.Name Three Ways Of Posting Acquisition Cost To A Fixed Asset Master? Ans: There are many ways of booking APC to fixed asset records including:- Via F-90 – Acquisition with Vendor. ABZON – Acquisition with automatic offsetting entry. ABZP – from affiliated company. From settlement of an asset under construction (AIBU). From goods receipt (or invoice receipt depending on system setup) relating to a purchase order. Q.What Is An "asset Under Construction"? Ans: AuC’s can be used to track investment cost during projects or asset assembly. Following completion their costs can be settled to other fixed assets or to other CO cost objects such as real internal orders or cost centres. For example, the construction of a new building, the various costs involved (engineering, utlity cost etc) could be collected under an AUC, before being settled to an asset under the 'buildings’ asset class at the end of the project. AuC’s generally are not depreciated until completion. Q.What Is The Difference Between 'company Code' And 'company Id' When In The Fi Global Settings In The Img? Ans: The company code is the legal entity organization unit and the lowest level at which external financial statements are prepared. The company id is a higher organization unit used for consolidation in the SAP system. A single company id can have many company codes assigned to it so long as the fiscal year variant and chart of accounts is consistent. Q.What Is A 'financial Statement Version'? Ans: Financial statement versions FSV’s are the structures forming the P’L and Balance sheet reports from the FI module. Accounts are assigned to the end nodes in the reporting structure tree. Depending on the setup debit /credit balances can be reflected in different asset / liability columns where required. Q.How Do You Define A New Company Code ? Ans: Using transaction code EC01, the most straightforward way of creating a new company code is to copy an existing value. All associated data such as the fiscal year variant and assignments to controlling area and credit control area are taken across from the source value. Transactional data of course is not copied. Here, interviewers are simply looking to hear the word “copy” to prove that you have defined a SAP FI/CO organizational structure before.

SAP GRC Interview Questions

Q.Explain The Personalization Tab Within A Role? Ans: Personalization is a way to save information that could be common to users, I meant to a user role… E.g. you can create SAP queries and manage authorizations by user groups. Now this information can be stored in the personalization tab of the role. (I supposed that it is a way for SAP to address his ambiguity of its concept of user group and roles: is “usergroup” a grouping of people sharing the same access or is it the role who is the grouping of people sharing the same access) Q.Is There A Table For Authorizations Where I Can Quickly See The Values Entered In A Group Of Fields? Ans: In particular I am looking to find the field values for P_ORGIN across a number of authorization profiles, without having to drill down on each profile and authorization. AGR_1251 will give you some reasonable info. Q.How Can I Do A Mass Delete Of The Roles Without Deleting The New Roles? Ans: There is a SAP delivered report that you can copy, remove the system type check and run. To do a landscape with delete, enter the roles to be deleted in a transport, run the delete program or manually delete and then release the transport and import them into all clients and systems. It is called: AGR_DELETE_ALL_ACTIVITY_GROUPS. To used it, you need to tweak/debug & replace the code as it has a check that ensure it is deleting SAP delivered roles only. Once you get past that little bit, it works well. Q.Someone Has Deleted Users In Our System, And I Am Eager To Find Out Who. Is There A Table Where This Is Logged? Ans: Debug or use RSUSR100 to find the info’s. Run transaction SUIM and down its Change documents. Q.How To Insert Missing Authorization? Ans: su53 is the best transaction with which we can find the missing authorizations.and we can insert those missing authorization through pfcg. Q.What Is The Difference Between Role And A Profile? Ans: Role and profile go hand in hand. Profile is bought in by a role. Role is used as a template, where you can add T-codes, reports..Profile is one which gives the user authorization. When you create a role, a profile is automatically created. Q.What Profile Versions? Ans: Profile versions are nothing but when u modifies a profile parameter through a RZ10 and generates a new profile is created with a different version and it is stored in the database. Q.What Is The Use Of Role Templates? Ans: User role templates are predefined activity groups in SAP consisting of transactions, reports and web addresses. Q.What Is The Different Between Single Role & Composite Role? Ans: A role is a container that collects the transaction and generates the associated profile. A composite roles is a container which can collect several different roles Q.Is It Possible To Change Role Template? How? Ans: Yes, we can change a user role template. There are exactly three ways in which we can work with user role templates we can use it as they are delivered in sap we can modify them as per our needs through pfcg we can create them from scratch. Q.How To Create Users? Ans: Execute transaction SU01 and fill in all the field. When creating a new user, you must enter an initial password for that user on the Logon data tab. All other data is optional. Click here for turotial on creating sap user id. Q.What Is The Difference Between Usobx_c And Usobt_c? Ans: The table USOBX_C defines which authorization checks are to be performed within a transaction and which not (despite authority-check command programmed ). This table also determines which authorization checks are maintained in the Profile Generator. The table USOBT_C defines for each transaction and for each authorization object which default values an authorization created from the authorization object should have in the Profile Generator. Q.List R/3 User Types? Ans: Dialog users are used for individual user. Check for expired/initial passwords Possible to change your own password. Check for multiple dialog logon A Service user – Only user administrators can change the password. No check for expired/initial passwords. Multiple logon permitted System users are not capable of interaction and are used to perform certain system activities, such as background processing, ALE, Workflow, and so on. A Reference user is, like a System user, a general, non-personally related, user. Additional authorizations can be assigned within the system using a reference user. A reference user for additional rights can be assigned for every user in the Roles tab. Q.What Is A Derived Role? Ans: Derived roles refer to roles that already exist. The derived roles inherit the menu structure and the functions included (transactions, reports, Web links, and so on) from the role referenced. A role can only inherit menus and functions if no transaction codes have been assigned to it before. The higher-level role passes on its authorizations to the derived role as default values which can be changed afterwards. Organizational level definitions are not passed on. They must be created anew in the inheriting role. User assignments are not passed on either. Derived roles are an elegant way of maintaining roles that do not differ in their functionality (identical menus and identical transactions) but have different characteristics with regard to the organizational level. Q.What Is A Composite Role? Ans: A composite role is a container which can collect several different roles. For reasons of clarity, it does not make sense and is therefore not allowed to add composite roles to composite roles. Composite roles are also called roles. Composite roles do not contain authorization data. If you want to change the authorizations (that are represented by a composite role), you must maintain the data for each role of the composite role. Creating composite roles makes sense if some of your employees need authorizations from several roles. Instead of adding each user separately to each role required, you can set up a composite role and assign the users to that group. The users assigned to a composite role are automatically assigned to the corresponding (elementary) roles during the comparison. Q.What Does User Compare Do? Ans: If you are also using the role to generate authorization profiles, then you should note that the generated profile is not entered in the user master record until the user master records have been compared. You can automate this by scheduling report FCG_TIME_DEPENDENCY on. Q.How Do I Change The Name Of Master / Parent Role Keeping The Name Of Derived/child Role Same? I Would Like To Keep The Name Of Derived /child Role Same And Also The Profile Associated With The Child Roles.? Ans: First copy the master role using PFCG to a role with new name you wish to have. Then you have to generate the role. Now open each derived role and delete the menu. Once the menus are removed it will let you put new inheritance. You can put the name of the new master role you created. This will help you keep the same derived role name and also the same profile name. Once the new roles are done you can transport it. The transport automatically includes the Parent roles. Q.What Is The Difference Between C (check) And U (unmentioned)? Ans: Background: When defining authorizations using Profile Generator, the table USOBX_C defines which authorization checks should occur within a transaction and which authorization checks should be maintained in the PG. You determine the authorization checks that can be maintained in the PG using Check Indicators. It is a Check Table for Table USOBT_C. In USOBX_C there are 4 Check Indicators. CM (Check/Maintain) An authority check is carried out against this object. The PG creates an authorization for this object and field values are displayed for changing. Default values for this authorization can be maintained. C (Check) An authority check is carried out against this object. The PG does not create an authorization for this object, so field values are not displayed. No default values can be maintained for this authorization. N (No check) The authority check against this object is disabled. The PG does not create an authorization for this object, so field values are not displayed. No default values can be maintained for this authorization. U (Unmaintained) No check indicator is set. An authority check is always carried out against this object. The PG does not create an authorization for this object, so field values are not displayed. No default values can be maintained for this authorization. Q.Can Wildcards Be Used In Authorizations? Ans: Authorization values may contain wildcards; however, the system ignores everything after the wildcard. Therefore, A*B is the same as A*. Q.What Does The Pfcg_time_dependency Clean Up? Ans: The ‘PFCG_TIME_DEPENDENCY’ background report only cleans up the profiles (that is, it does not clean up the roles in the system). Alternatively, you may use transaction ‘PFUD’. Q.What Happens To Change Documents When They Are Transported To The Production System? Ans: Change documents cannot be displayed in transaction ‘SUIM’ after they are transported to the production system because we do not have the ‘befor input’ method for the transport. This means that if changes are made, the ‘USR10′ table is filled with the current values and writes the old values to the ‘USH10′ table beforehand. The difference between both tables is then calculated and the value for the change documents is determined as a result. However, this does not work when change documents are transported to the production system. The ‘USR10′ table is automatically filled with the current values for the transport and there is no option for filling the ‘USH10′ table in advance (for the history) because we do not have a ‘befor input’ method to fill the ‘USH10′ table in advance for the transport. Q.What Is The Difference Between The Table Buffer And The User Buffer? Ans: The table buffers are in the shared memory. Buffering the tables increases performance when accessing the data records contained in the table. Table buffers and table entries are ignored during startup. A user buffer is a buffer from which the data of a user master record is loaded when the user logs on. The user buffer has different setting options with regard to the ‘auth/new_buffering’ parameter. Q.What Does The Profile Generator Do? Ans: The Profile Generator creates roles. It is important that suitable user roles, and not profiles, are entered manually in transaction ‘SU01′. The system should enter the profiles for this user automatically. Q.How Many Authorizations Fit Into A Profile? Ans: A maximum of 150 authorizations fit into a profile. If the number of authorizations exceeds this marker, the Profile Generator will automatically create more profiles for the role. A profile name consists of twelve (12) characters and the first ten (10) may be changed when generated for the first time. Q.What Are The Prerequisites We Should Take Before Assigning Sap_all To A User Even We Have Approval From Authorization Controllers? Ans: prerequisites are follows before assigning sap_all to any user . 1.enabling the audit log —- using sm19 tcode. 2.retreving the audit log—–using sm20 tcode. this process follows when your not implementing grc in your system. Q.What Is The Landscape Of Grc? Ans: GRC Landscape is 2 system landscape, 1. SAP GRC DEV 2. SAP GRC PRD in GRC there is no Quality system. Q.What Is The Rule Set In Grc? Ans: Collection of rules is nothing but rule set. There is a default rule set in GRC called Global Rule Set. Q.What Are The Critical Tcodes And Authorization Objects In R/3? Ans: Just to say all the t-codes which can affect roles and user master records are critical ones. SU01, PFCG, RZ10, RZ11, SU21, SU03, Sm37 are some of critical t-codes. Below are critical objects: S_TABU_DIS S_USER_AGR S_USER_AUT S_USER_PRO S_USER_GRP Q.If U R Using 10 Firefighter Ids At A Time? How Will The Log Reports Goes To Controller? Ans: This is done when ever role is already assigned to users and changes are done in that role. In order to get the changes adjusted in the roles, user comparision is done. Q.What Is Ruleset? And How To Update Risk Id In Rule Set? Ans: Also during indirect asssignment of roles to user using t codes Po13 and po10, we have to to do user comparision, so that the roles get reflected in the SU01 record of user. Q.What Is The Procedure For Role Modifications? Explain With Example? Ans: Generally this task is done PFCG_TIME_DEPENDENCY background job which runs once daily so that roles are adjusted after running this report. Q.Who Will Done User Comparison? Ans: If changes are to be reflected immediately, user comparison is recommended. Contact for more on SAP GRC Online Training

SAP Hana Interview Questions

Q.What is the reason for going In-memory? Answer: One reason is the number of CPU cycles per second is increasing and the cost of processors is decreasing. For managing the data in memory, there is five-minute rule which is based on the suggestion that it costs more to wait for the data to be fetched from disk than it costs to keep data in memory so it depends on how often you fetch the data. For example there is a table and no matter how large it is and this table is touched by a query at least once every 55 minutes, it is less expensive (in hardware costs) to keep it in memory than to read it from memory and if it is frequently accessed it is less expensive to store it in memory. Q.What is a Five-minute rule? Answer: It is a rule of thumb for deciding whether a data item should be kept in memory, or stored on disk and read back into memory when required. The rule is “randomly accessed disk pages of cache are re-used every 5 minutes”. Q.What is multi-core CPU? Answer: Multiple CPU’s on one chip or in one package is called multi-core CPU. . Traditional databases for online transaction processing (OLTP) do not use current hardware efficiently. Q.What is Stall? Answer: Waiting for data to be loaded from main memory into the CPU cache is called as Stalls. Q.What is SAP In-Memory Appliance (SAP HANA)? Answer: HANA is an in-memory technique to store data that is particularly suited for handling very large amounts of tabular, or relational, data with extra ordinary performance. Common databases store tabular data row-wise. Reorganizing the data in memory column-wise brings a tremendous speed increase when accessing a subset of the data in each table row. Q.What are the components or products of HANA? Answer: SAP HANA contains the following components and administration tools: • SAP® In-Memory Computing Engine (IMCE) Server 1.0 • SAP® IMCE Clients 1.0 – The IMCE clients are the interfaces by which the IMCE can communicate with other components. The following subcomponents are included: IMCE ODBO 1.0 IMCE ODBC 1.0 IMCE JDBC 1.0 IMCE SQLDBC 1.0 • SAP® IMCE Studio1.0 (includes SAP HANA Modeler) • Sybase Replication Server 15 + Sybase Enterprise Connect Data Access (ECDA) • Sybase Replication Agent • SAP® HANA Load Controller 1.0 (includes R3Load, RepServer De-cluster Add-On) • SAP® Host Agent 7.20 Q.What are the different editions available in HANA appliance software? Answer: Platform , and Enterprise edition. Platform edition is intended for customers who want to use ETL-based replication and already have a license for SAP BO Data Services. Enterprise edition is intended for customers who want to use either trigger-based replication or ETL-based replication and do not already have all of the necessary licenses for SAP BO Data Services. Extended edition is intended for customers who want to use the full potential of all available replication scenarios including log-based replication. Q.What is columnar and Row-Based Data Storage? Answer: A database table contains data in the form of rows and columns. However Computer memory is organized as a linear structure. To store a table in linear memory, there are two options. A row-based storage stores a table as a sequence of records, each of which contains the fields of one row. In a columnar storage the entries of a column are stored in contiguous memory locations. The SAP HANA database allows to specify whether a table is to be stored column-wise or row-wise. It is also possible to alter an existing table from columnar to row-based and vice versa. Search operations in tabular data can be accelerated by organizing data in columns instead in rows. Q.What are the advantages of Column based tables? Answer: Calculations are typically executed on single or a few columns only. The table is searched based on values of a few columns. The table has a large number of columns. The table has a large number of rows and columnar operations are required (aggregate, scan, etc.). High compression rates can be achieved because the majority of the columns contain only few distinct values (compared to number of rows). Q.What are the advantages of Row-based tables? Answer: The application needs to only process a single record at one time (many selects and/or updates of single records). The application typically needs to access a complete record (or row). The columns contain mainly distinct values so that the compression rate would be low. Neither aggregations nor fast searching are required. The table has a small number of rows (e. g. configuration tables). Q.In which case the data to be stored in columnar storage? Answer: To enable fast on-the-fly aggregations, ad-hoc reporting, and to benefit from compression mechanisms it is recommended that transaction data to be stored in a column-based table. Q.Is it possible to join tables of row-based with column-based tables? Answer: Yes Q.Are column-based tables always the better choice than row-based tables? Answer: No. There are also situations in which row based tables are advantageous. Q.What are the advantages of Columnar tables? Answer: Higher Data Compression Rates Higher Performance for Column Operations Elimination of Additional Indexes Parallelization Elimination of Materialized Aggregates Q.What are the different Compression Techniques you know? Answer: Run-length encoding Cluster encoding Dictionary encoding Q.Why materialized aggregates are not required? Answer: With a scanning speed of several gigabytes per millisecond, in-memory column stores, make it possible to calculate aggregates on large amounts of data on the fly with high performance. This is expected to eliminate the need for materialized aggregates in many cases. Q.What are the advantages of Eliminating materialized aggregates? Answer: No additional tables for storing aggregate results means: Simplified data model Simplified application logic Higher level of concurrency and With the fly Aggregation we have aggregated values up to date Q.What is parallelization? Answer: Column-based storage makes it easy to execute operations in parallel using multiple processor cores. In a column store data is already vertically partitioned means that operations on different columns can easily be processed in parallel. If multiple columns need to be searched or aggregated, each of these operations can be assigned to a different processor core. In addition operations on one column can be parallelized by partitioning the column into multiple sections that can be processed by different processor cores (core 3 and 4 below). Q.What are the different types of replication techniques? Answer: 1.ETL based replication using BODS 2.Trigger based replication using SLT 3.Extractor based data acquisition using DXC Q.What is SLT? Answer: SLT stands for SAP Landscape Transformation which is a trigger based replication. SLT replication server is the replication technology to pass data from source system to the target system. The source can be either SAP or non-SAP. Target system is SAP HANA system which contains HANA database. Q.Is it possible to load and replicate data from one source system to multiple target database schemas of HANA system? Answer: Yes. It is possible for up to 4. Q.Is it possible to specify the type of data load and replication? Answer: Yes either in real time, or scheduled by time or by interval. Q.What is Configuration in SLT? Answer: The information to create the connection between the source system, SLT system, and the SAP HANA system is specified within the SLT system as a Configuration. You can define a new configuration in Configuration & Monitoring Dashboard (transaction LTR). Q.Is there any pre-requisite before creating the configuration and replication? Answer: For the SAP source systems DMIS add-on is installed in SLT replication server. User for RFC connection has the role IUUC_REPL_REMOTE assigned but not DDIC. For non-SAP source systems DMIS add-on is not required and grant a database user sufficient authorization for data replication. Q.What is Configuration and Monitoring Dashboard? Answer: It is an application that runs on SLT replication server to specify configuration information (such as source system, target system, and relevant connections) so that data can be replicated. It can also use it to monitor the replication status (transaction LTR). Status Yellow: It may occur due to triggers which are not yet created successfully. Status Red: It may occur if master job is aborted (manually in transaction SM37). Q.What is advanced replication settings? Answer: A transaction that runs on SLT replication server to specify advanced replication settings like Modifying target table structures, Specifying performance optimization settings Define transformation rules Q.What is Latency? Answer: It is the length of time to replicate data (a table entry) from the source system to the target system. Q.What is logging table? Answer: A table in the source system that records any changes to a table that is being replicated. This ensures that SLT replication server can replicate these changes to the target system. Q.What are Transformation rules? Answer: A rule specified in the Advanced Replication settings transaction for source tables such that data is transformed during the replication process. Example you can specify rule to Convert fields Fill empty fields Skip records Q.What happens when you set-up a new configuration? Answer: The database connection is automatically created along with GUID and Mass transfer id (MT_ID). A schema GUID ensures that configurations with the same schema name can be created. The Mass transfer ID is used in the naming of SLT jobs and the system can uniquely identify a schema. Q.What factors influence the change/increase the number of jobs? Answer: Number of configurations managed by the SLT replication server Number of tables to be loaded/replicated for each configuration Expected speed of initial load Expected replication latency time. As a rule of thumb, one BDG job should be used for each 10 tables in replication to achieve acceptable latency times. Q.When to change the number of Data Transfer jobs? Answer: If the speed of the initial load/replication latency time is not satisfactory If SLT replication server has more resources than initially available, we can increase the number of data transfer and/or initial load jobs After the completion of the initial load, we may want to reduce the number of initial load jobs Q.What are the jobs involved in replication process? Answer: 1. Master Job (IUUC_MONITOR_) 2. Master Controlling Job (IUUC_REPLIC_CNTR_) 3. Data Load Job (DTL_MT_DATA_LOAD__) 4.Migration Object Definition Job (IUUC_DEF_MIG_OBJ_) 5.Access Plan Calculation Job (ACC_PLAN_CALC__) Q.What is the relation between the number of data transfer jobs in the configuration settings and the available BGD work processes? Answer: Each job occupies 1 BGD work processes in SLT replication server. For each configuration, the parameter Data Transfer Jobs restricts the maximum number of data load job for each mass transfer ID (MT_ID). A mass transfer ID requires at least 4 background jobs to be available: One master job One master controller job At least one data load job One additional job either for migration/access plan calculation/to change configuration settings in “Configuration and Monitoring Dashboard”. Q.If you set the parameter “data transfer jobs” to 04 in a configuration “SCHEMA1”, a mass transfer ID 001 is assigned. Then what jobs should be in the system? Answer: 1 Master job (IUUC_MONITOR_SCHEMA1) 1 Master Controller job (IUUC_REPL_CNTR_001_0001) At most 4 parallel jobs for MT_ID 001 (DTL_MT_DATA_LOAD_001_ 01/~02/~03/~04) Performance: If lots of tables are selected for load / replication at the same time, it may happen that there are not enough background jobs available to start the load procedure for all tables immediately. In this case you can increase the number of initial load jobs, otherwise tables will be handled sequentially. For tables with large volume of data, you can use the transaction “Advanced Replication Settings (IUUC_REPL_CONT)” to further optimize the load and replication procedure for dedicated tables. Q.What happens after the SLT replication is over? Answer: The SLT replication server creates 1 user, 4 roles, 2 stored procedures and 8 tables. 1 User 1 Privilege 4 Roles _DATA_PROV _POWER_USER _USER_ADMIN _SELECT 2 Stored procedures RS_GRANT_ACCESS, RS_REVOKE_ACCESS 8 Tables DD02L, DD02T, RS_LOG_FILES, RS_MESSAGES, RS_ORDER, RS_ORDER_EXT, RS_SCHEMA_MAP, RS_STATUS Q.What are the different replication scenarios? Answer: Load, Replicate, Stop, Suspend and Resume. Before you select any application table, the initial load of the tables DD02L, DD02T & DD08L must be completed as they contain the metadata information. Load: Starts an initial load of replication data from the source system. The procedure is a one-time event. After it is completed, further changes to the source system database will not be replicated. For the initial load procedure, neither database triggers nor logging tables are created in the source system. Default settings use reading type 3 (DB_SETGET) with up to 3 background jobs in parallel to load tables in parallel or subsequently into the HANA system. Replicate: Combines an initial load procedure and the subsequent replication procedure (real time or scheduled). Before the initial load procedure will start, database trigger and related logging table are created for each table in the source system as well as in SLT replication server. Stop Replication: Stops any current load or replication process of a table. The stop function will remove the database trigger and related logging tables completely. Only use this function if you do want to continue a selected table otherwise you must initially load the table again to ensure data consistency. Suspend: Pauses a table from a running replication. The database trigger will not be deleted from the source system. The recording of changes will continue and related information is stored in the related logging tables in the source system. If you suspend tables for a long time the size of logging tables may increase and adjust the table space if required. Resume: Restarts the application for a suspended table. The previous suspended replication will be resumed (no new initial load required). Q.What happens if the replication is suspended for a long period of time or system outage of SLT or HANA system? Answer: The size of the logging tables increases. Q.How to avoid unnecessary logging information from being stored? Answer: Pause the replication by stopping the schema-related jobs. Q.Will the table size in SAP HANA database and in the source system the same? Answer: No as HANA database supports compression. Q.When to go for table partitioning? Answer: If the table size in HANA database exceeds 2 billion records, split the table by using portioning features by using “Advanced replication settings” (transaction IUUC_REPL_CONT, tab page IUUC_REPL_TABSTG). Q.Where do you define transformation rules? Answer: By using “Advanced replication settings” (transaction IUUC_REPL_CONT, tab page IUUC ASS RULE MAP) Q.Are there any special considerations if the source system is non-SAP system? Answer: The concept of trigger-based replication is actually meant for SAP source systems. The main differences are: There will be a database connection between non-SAP source and SLT system instead of RFC. Source must have primary key Tables DD02L, DD02T which contains metadata are just initially loaded but not replicated. The read modules reside on SLT system. Tables with database specific formats may need transformation rules before they are replicated. Only SAP supported databases (with respective DBSL for SAP Net Weaver 7.02) are supported as non-SAP source systems. Q.What are the potential issues in the creation of configuration? Answer: Missing add-on DMIS_2010 in source system Missing the proper role of SAP_IUUC_REPL_REMOTE for RFC user ( SAP_IUUC_USER for SLT system ) Logon credentials are not correct Q.How can you ensure that data is consistent in source system and HANA system? Answer: Since any changes in the source system is tracked in dedicated logging tables, the replication status for each changed data record is transparent. A entry of logging table is deleted after a successful commit statement from HANA database and this procedure ensures the data consistency between source system and HANA system. Q.Does SLT for SAP HANA support data compression like SAP HANA database? Answer: Yes, this is automatically covered by the RFC connection used for data replication from the SAP source system. Q.Maximum number of tables in a schema? Answer: 131072 Q.What can be the maximum table name length? Answer: 127 characters Q.What can be the maximum column name length? Answer: 127 characters Q.What can be the maximum number of columns in a table? Answer: 1000 Q.What can be the maximum number of columns in a view? Answer: 1000 Q.What can be the maximum number of partitions of a column table? Answer: 1000 Q.What can be the maximum number of rows in each table? Answer: Limited by storage size RS: 1TB/sizeof(row) CS: 2^31 * number of partitions Q.In which table you can get the current system limits? Answer: M_SYSTEM_LIMITS Q.Maximum number of jobs you can view the information in the Current tab of Job log? Answer: 5 Q.What is SQLScript? Answer: It is a set of SQL extensions for SAP HANA database which allow developers to push data intensive logic into the database. Q.When should be SQLScript used? Answer: It should be used in cases where other modeling constructs of HANA such as Attribute views or Analytic views are not sufficient. Q.Explain how SQLScript procedure is processed in HANA database? Answer: When a user creates a new procedure, the HANA database query compiler first: Parse the statements Check the statement semantic correctness Optimize the code for Declarative and Imperative logic Code generation creates Calculation models for Declarative logic and L nodes for Imperative logic Compiled procedure creates Content in the database Catalog and in Repository. Q.What happens when you compile the procedure? Answer: During compilation, the call to the procedure is rewritten for processing by the calculation engine. Q.What happens when you execute the procedure? Answer: It binds the actual parameters to the calculation models generated in the definition phase. Q.What are the data types supported in SQLScript? Answer: SQLScript allows the definitions of table types and also supports primitive data types such as Integer, Decimal(p,q), Varchar, Blob, Timestamp, etc. Q.What is a table type? Answer: Table types are used to define parameters for a procedure that represent tabular results. Example: CREATE TYPE tt_publishers AS TABLE ( publisher INTEGER, name VARCHAR(50), price DECIMAL, cnt INTEGER); CREATE TYPE tt_years AS TABLE ( year VARCHAR(4), price DECIMAL, cnt INTEGER); Q.What is the general syntax used in creating procedure? Answer: CREATE PROCEDURE ] AS BEGIN END Q.How to recompile a procedure? Answer: ALTER PROCEDURE proc_name RECOMPILE Q.Can you specify a default value while creating procedure? Is there any change while calling the procedure? Answer: CREATE PROCEDURE my_proc (IN P1 INT, IN P2 INT DEFAULT 1, OUT out1 DUMMY) AS BEGIN out1 = SELECT 1 + 2 AS DUMMY FROM DUMMY; END; While calling the procedure, we need to pass ‘Named Parameters’ with token (=>). CALL my_proc (P1 => 3, out1 => ?) If you want to specify all the input fields then call statement would be: CALL my_proc (3, 4, ?) Q.What is the purpose of procedure ‘Call… With Overview’ option? Answer: To write the results of a procedure call directly into a physical table. CALL my_proc (3, 4, NULL) WITH OVERVIEW; Q.What is the purpose of procedure ‘Call…..In Debug Mode’ option? Answer: It creates the additional debug information during the execution of the procedure. This type of call has additional runtime overhead hence should be used for debugging purposes only. CALL my_proc (3, 4, NULL) IN DEBUG MODE; Q.What is Table variable? Answer: These are variables with table type which are bound to the value of a physical table, SQL query or a calculation engine plan operator. Table variables are bound using equality operator. Q.What is a scalar variable? Answer: We define scalar variable as IN, OUT, or INOUT and can be referenced anywhere in a procedure. lt_expensive_books = SELECT title, price, crcy FROM :it_books WHERE price > :minPrice AND crcy = :currency; In above assignment, the variable lt_expensive_books is bound. Variable :it_books refers to an IN parameter of a Table type. :minPrice and :currency refer to IN parameter of a scalar type. Q.What is CE plan operator? What are the different categories? Answer: CE plan operator does the data transformation functionality internally and used in definition of functions. It is an alternate to using SQL statements. Data Source Access operators that bind a column table or a column view to a table variable. (CE_COLUMN_TABLE, CE_JOIN_VIEW, CE_OLAP_VIEW, CE_CALC_VIEW) Relational operators that allow a user to bypass the SQL processor during evaluation and directly executed in the calculation engine. (CE_JOIN, CE_LEFT_OUTER_JOIN, CE_RIGHT_OUTER_JOIN, CE_PROJECTION,CE_CALC, CE_AGGREGATION, CE_UNION_ALL) Special extensions implement, e.g., crucial business functions inside the database kernel. (CE_VERTICAL_UNION, CE_CONVERSION) Q.What is CE_COLUMN_TABLE operator? Answer: It provides access to an existing column table. It takes the name of the table and returns its content bound to a variable. Example: ot_books1 = CE_COLUMN_TABLE (“BOOKS”); ot_books2 = CE_COLUMN_TABLE (“BOOKS”, ); This example only works on a column table and does not invoke the SQL processor. It is semantically equivalent to the following: ot_books3 = SELECT * FROM books; ot_books4 = SELECT title, price, crcy FROM books; The function that provide data source access does not allow renaming of attributes. Q.What is CE_JOIN_VIEW operator? Answer: It return results for an existing join view (also known as Attribute view). It takes the name of join view and optional list of attributes as parameters. Example: out = CE_JOIN_VIEW (“PRODUCT_SALES”, ); Q.What is CE_OLAP_VIEW operator? Answer: It return results for an existing OLAP view (also known as Analytical view). It takes the name of OLAP view and an optional list of key figures and dimensions as parameters. The OLAP view is grouped by dimensions and the key figures are aggregated using the default aggregation of the OLAP view. Example: out = CE_OLAP_VIEW (“OLAP_view”,); Is equivalent to out = SELECT dim1, SUM(kf) FROM OLAP_view GROUP BY dim1; Q.What is CE_CALC_VIEW operator? Answer: It returns results for an existing calculation view. It takes the name of the calculation view and optionally a projection list of attribute names. Example: out = CE_CALC_VIEW (“CALC_view”, ); Is equivalent to out = SELECT cid, cname FROM CALC_view; Q.What is CE_JOIN operator? Answer: It calculates a inner join of the given pair of tables on a list of join attributes. Each pair of join attributes must have identical attribute names else one of them must be renamed prior to the join. Example: ot_pubs_books1 = CE_JOIN (:lt_pubs, :it_books, ); ot_pubs_books2 = CE_JOIN (:lt_pubs, :it_books, , ); Is equivalent to ot_pubs_books3 = SELECT P.publisher as publisher, name, street, post_code, city, country, isbn, title, edition, year, price, crcy FROM :lt_pubs AS P, :it_books as B WHERE P.publisher = B.publisher; ot_pubs_books4 = SELECT title, name, P.publisher as publisher, year FROM :lt_pubs AS P, :it_books AS B WHERE P.publisher = B.publisher; Q.What is CE_LEFT_OUTER_JOIN operator? Answer: It calculates the left outer join. Besides the function name the syntax is same as CE_JOIN. Q.What is CE_RIGHT_OUTER_JOIN operator? Answer: It calculates the right outer join. Besides the function name the syntax is same as CE_JOIN. Q.What is CE_PROJECTION operator? Answer: It restricts the columns in the table variable and optionally renames columns, computes expression, or applies a filter. Example: ot_books1 = CE_PROJECTION(:it_books, , ‘“PRICE” > 50′); Is equivalent to ot_books2 = SELECT title, price, crcy AS currency FROM :it_books WHERE price > 50; 24.What is CE_CALC operator? It evaluates an expression and then bound to a new column Example: with_tax = CE_PROJECTION(:product, , ””CNAME” = ‘:cname”’); Is equivalent to with_tax2 = SELECT cid, cname, oid, sales, sales * :vat_rate AS sales_vat FROM :product WHERE cname = ‘:cname’; All columns used in CE_CALC have to be included in the projection list. Another frequent use of CE_CALC is computing row numbers. CE_CALC(‘rownum()’, integer) AS “RANK” Q.What is CE_AGGREGATION operator? Answer: It groups the input and computes aggregates for each group. Supported aggregate functions are count(“column”), sum(“column”), max(“column”), min(“column”). Use sum(“column”)/count(“column”) to compute the average. Example: ot_books1 = CE_AGGREGATION(:it_books, , ); Is equivalent to ot_books2 = SELECT COUNT (publisher) as cnt, year FROM :it_books GROUP BY year; 26.What is CE_UNION_ALL operator? It computes the union of two tables which need to have identical schemas. Example: ot_all_books1 = CE_UNION_ALL (:lt_books, :it_audit_books); Is equivalent to ot_all_books2 = SELECT * FROM :lt_books UNION ALL SELECT * FROM :it_audit_books; Q.What is special operator? Answer: CE_VERTICAL_UNION and CE_CONVERSION are the special operators which do not have any immediate SQL equivalent. 28.What operator is used to debug SQLScript procedures? TRACE operaor. It traces the tabular data passed as its argument into a local temporary table and return its input unmodified. The names of the temporary tables can be retrieved from the SYS.SQLSCRIPT_TRACE view. Example: out = TRACE (:input); Q.How to set-up tracing? Answer: From the Administration perspective, navigate to tab “Trace Configuration” . In order to change settings, you need to have system privileges “TRACE ADMIN” and “INFILE ADMIN”. Q.What is the difference between BREAK and CONTINUE? Answer: Break means loop should stop processing, CONTINUE means loop should stop processing the current iteration and immediately start processing the next iteration. Q.What is Cursor? Answer: It is used to fetch single rows from the result set returned by a query. CREATE PROCEDURE cursor_proc LANGUAGE SQLSCRIPT AS v_isbn VARCHAR(20); CURSOR c_cursor1 (v_isbn VARCHAR(20)) FOR SELECT isbn, title, price, crcy FROM books WHERE isbn = :v_isbn ORDER BY isbn; BEGIN OPEN c_cursor1(’978-3-86894-012-1′); IF c_cursor1::ISCLOSED THEN CALL ins_msg_proc(‘WRONG: cursor not open’); ELSE CALL ins_msg_proc(‘OK: cursor open’); END IF; FETCH c_cursor1 INTO v_isbn, v_title, v_price, v_crcy; IF c_cursor1::NOTFOUND THEN CALL ins_msg_proc(‘WRONG: cursor contains no valid data’); ELSE CALL ins_msg_proc(‘OK: cursor contains valid data’); END IF; CLOSE c_cursor1; END; Q.How to loop cursor over result sets? Answer: Using FOR loop. CREATE PROCEDURE foreach_proc() LANGUAGE SQLSCRIPT AS v_isbn VARCHAR(20) := ”; CURSOR c_cursor1 (v_isbn VARCHAR(20)) FOR SELECT isbn, title, price, crcy FROM books ORDER BY isbn; BEGIN FOR cur_row as c_cursor1 DO CALL ins_msg_proc(‘book title is: ‘ || cur_row.title); END FOR; END; Q.What are the two developer roles in HANA SPS05? Answer: The two developer roles are Modeler and Application Programmer. Modeler: modeler is concerned with the definition of model and schemas used in the SAP HANA, the specification and definition of tables, views, primary keys, indexes, partitions and inter-relationship of the data, designing and defining authorization and access control through the specification of privileges, roles and users and generally uses the perspective “Administration Console” and “Modeler”. Application Programmer: Programmer is concerned with building SAP HANA applications which are designed based on MVC (model-view-controller) architecture and generally uses the perspective “SAP HANA Development”. Q.Explain HANA database Architecture (SP05)? Answer: Clients connect to the database system which forms a session within the database in the form of SQL statements. In the HANA database, each SQL statement is processed in the context of a transaction. New sessions are assigned to a new transaction. Traditional database applications uses JDBC and ODBC interface to communicate with the database management system over a network connection and application uses SQL to manage and query the data stored in the database. In the HANA database Index server is the main component of database management which contains the actual data stores and the engines for processing the data. The index server processes incoming SQL or MDX statements in the context of transaction. The Transaction manager coordinates database transactions, and keeps track of running and closed transactions. When a transaction is committed or rolled back, the transaction manager informs the involved storage engines about this event so they can execute necessary actions. The HANA database has its own scripting language called SQLScript that is designed to enable optimization and parallelization. HANA supports the Business Functional Library (BFL) and Predictive Analysis Library (PAL) and can be called directly from within SQLScript. It also supports the development of programs written in R language. SQL and SQLScript are implemented using a common infrastructure of Built-in functions. That have access to various meta definitions such as definitions of relational tables, columns, views, and indexes, definitions of SQLScript procedures. This Metadata is stored in one common catalog (row store or column store). The Persistence layer ensures that the database after a restart is restored to the most recent committed state. It uses a combination of write-ahead logs, shadow paging and save points. The persistence layer also contains Logger that manages the transaction log. The Index server uses the Preprocessor Server for analyzing the text data and extracting the information based on text search capabilities. The Name Server knows where the components are running and which data is located on which server. The Statistics Server collects information about status, performance and resource consumption from other servers in the system. Q.What is SAP XS (Extended Application Service)? Answer: SAP HANA XS provides end-to-end support for web-based applications . Q.What are Development objects? Answer: The building blocks of SAP HANA applications are called development objects. Q.What is Repository? Answer: The HANA Repository is storage system for development objects and is built into SAP HANA. The repository supports Version control, Transport, and Sharing of objects between multiple developers. We can add objects to the repository, update the objects, publish the objects, and compile these objects into runtime objects. Q.What are the different perspectives available in HANA? Answer: Modeler: used for creating various types of views and analytical privileges. SAP HANA Development: Used for programming applications for creating development objects to access or update data models such as Server-side Java script or HTML files. Administration: Used to monitor the system and change settings. Debug: Used to debug code such as SQLScript (.procedure files) or Server-side Java script (.xsjs files). To open a perspective, go to Window → Open Perspective. Q.Before starting development work in SAP HANA studio, What are the roles a user should have on SAP HANA server ? Answer: Modeling, Content_Admin. Q.What is a Delivery Unit? Answer: Delivery unit (DU) is a container used by the Life Cycle Manager (LCM) to transport repository objects between the SAP HANA systems. The name of DU must contain only capital letters (A-Z), digits (0-9) and underscores (_). Q.What is a workspace? Answer: The place where you work on project-related objects is called a repository workspace. Q.What is a package and its types? Answer: Package is used to group together related content objects in SAP HANA studio. By default it creates Non-structural. Type Description Structural Package only contains sub-packages. It cannot contain repository objects. Non-Structural Package contains both repository objects and sub-packages. Q.What are the default packages delivered with the repository? Answer: Sap System-local System-local.generated System-local.private Q.What can be the maximum length of a package name? Answer: 190 characters including dots. Example: RajKumar.pkg123 Q.What are package privileges? Answer: REPO.READ: Read access to the selected package and design-time objects (both native and imported). REPO.EDIT_NATIVE_OBJECTS: Authorization to modify design-time objects in packages originating in the system the user is working in. REPO.ACTIVATE_NATIVE_OBJECTS: Authorization to activate/reactivate design-time objects in package originating in the system the user is working in. REPO.MAINTAIN_NATIVE_PACKAGES: Authorization to update or delete native packages or create sub-packages of packages originating in the system in which the user is working. Q.How each object is uniquely identified in the repository? Answer: Each object is uniquely identified by the combination of package name, object name and object type. Q.Can multiple objects of the same type can have the same object name? Answer: Yes, only when they belong to different packages. 16.What are the different tasks you can perform in setting up the basis persistence model for SAP HANA XS? Creating Schema, Creating Table, Creating View, Creating Sequence and Importing table content. Q.What are the different tasks you can perform in modeler perspective? Answer: Import metadata, Load data, Create packages, Create information views, Create Procedures, Create Analytical privileges, Import SAP NetWeaver BW objects, Create Decision Tables, Import and Export objects. Q.What are the supported object types in modeler perspective? Answer: Attribute views, Analytical views, Calculation views, Analytical privileges, Procedures, Decision tables, Process Visibility Scenario. Q.What are the different modeler preferences and how do you set? Answer: You can set the modeler preferences by choosing the menu Window → Preferences → Modeler (or) Quick launch → Manage Preferences. Q.Why to configure Import server? Answer: In order to load data data from external sources to SAP HANA we need to establish a connection with the server. To connect, we need to provide details of Business Objects Data Services repository and ODBC drivers. Once the connection is established, we can import the tables definition and then load data into table definitions. Quick launch – Configure Import Server Enter the IP address of the server from which you want to import data Enter the repository name Enter the ODBC data source, and choose OK. Q.How to Import table definitions? Answer: If you want to import all table definitions, Go to File menu → Choose Import Expand the SAP HANA Content node Choose “Mass Import of Metadata” and choose next Select the target system where you want to import all the table definitions, and choose next In the Connections Details Dialog , enter the user name and password of the target system Select the required source system and choose Finish. Note: If you want to import selective table definitions use “Selective Import of Metadata”. Q.How to load data into tables? Answer: Quick Launch → Data Provisioning Choose Source Choose Load (for Initial load) or Replicate (for data replication) Select the required tables to load or replicate Click Finish. Q.How to upload data from Flat files? Answer: File menu → Import In ‘Select an Import Source’ section, expand the ‘SAP HANA Content’ node Select ‘Data from Local file’ and choose Next Select the Target system to which you want to import the data using Flat file, choose Next In ‘Define Properties Import Page’ browse the file containing the data Select ‘New’ option (If you want to load the data into a new table) or Select the ‘Existing’ option (If you want to append the data to an existing table) Click Finish. Q.How to copy standard content delivered by SAP? Answer: Quick Launch → Mass Copy Create a mapping between source package and target package Choose Next to view the summary Click Finish to confirm content copy. Q.What is Schema mapping? How do you do Schema mapping? Answer: Schema mapping is done when the physical schema in the target system is not the same as the physical schema in the source system. Quick Launch → Schema Mapping Choose Add Create a mapping in the Target system between the Authoring schema and Physical schema Click OK. Note: Schema mapping only applies to references from repository objects to catalog onjects. It is not intended to be used for repository to repository references. Q.In which configuration table, the mapping between authoring and physical schema is stored? Answer: SYS_BI.M_SCHEMA_MAPPING Q.What’s the purpose of Generating Time Data? Answer: If you model a time attribute view without generating time data, an empty view will be shown when you use data preview. To generate Time Data go to Quick Launch → Generate Time Data If your financial year is from January to December, Choose ‘Calender Type’ as Gregorian else Fiscal Click Generate. Q.In which configuration table the generated time data information will be stored? Answer: For Gregorian calendar type (SYS_BI) M_TIME_DIMENSION_YEAR M_TIME_DIMENSION_MONTH M_TIME_DIMENSION_WEEK M_TIME_DIMENSION For Fiscal M_FISCAL_CALENDAR Q.What is an Attribute? Answer: Attribute represents the descriptive data used in modeling. Example: City, Country, etc. Q.What is a Simple Attribute? Answer: Simple attributes are individual analytical elements that are derived from the data foundation. For example Product_ID, Product_Name are attributes of a Product subject area. Q.What is a Calculated Attribute? Answer: Calculated attributes are derived from one or more existing attributes or constants. For example deriving the full name of a customer (first name and last name), assigning a constant value to an attribute that can be used for arithmetic calculations. Q.What is a Private Attribute? Answer: Private attributes used in an analytical view allow you to customize the behavior of an attribute for only that view. For example if you create an analytical view and you want a particular attribute to behave differently than it does in the attribute view to which it belongs, you can define it as a private attribute. Q.What is a Measure? Answer: Measures are simple measurable analytical elements and are derived from Analytic and Calculation views. Q.What is a Simple Measure? Answer: Simple Measure is a measurable analytical element that is derived from the data foundation. Q.What is a Calculated Measure? Answer: Calculated Measures are defined based on a combination of data from OLAP cubes, arithmetic operators, constants, and functions. Q.What is a Restricted Measure? Answer: Restricted measures are used to filter the value for an output field based on the user-defined rules For example you can restrict the revenue column only for Region = APJ, Year = 2013. Q.What are Counters? Answer: Counters add a new measure to the Calculation view definition to count the recurrence of an attribute. For example, to count how many times Product appears. Q.What is an Attribute View? Answer: Attribute views are used to model entity based on the relationships between attribute data contained in multiple source tables. You can model Columns, Calculated columns and Hierarchies. Also you can fine-tune the attributes of an Attribute view: Can apply filter to restrict values Can be defined as Hidden so that they can be processed but not visible to end users Can be defined as key attributes and used when joining multiple tables Can be further drill down by ‘Drill Down Enable’ property. Q.What are the tables to be imported for creating attribute view of type Time? Answer: T009 and T009B. Q.What is Label Mapping? Answer: We can choose to associate an attribute with another attribute description. Label mapping is also called as Description mapping. For example if A1 has a label column B1, then you can rename B1 to A1.description. The related columns appear side by side during data preview. Q.What happens when one of the table in Attribute view has modified column with data type? Answer: It reflects the previous state of the columns, even if you remove and add it again. It is referring to the cache. To resolve this issue close the editor and reopen it. Q.What happens when you open an attribute view with a missing column in the required object? Answer: An error will be shown “column is not found in table schemaname.tablename” and the editor does not open. To make it consistent Open the required object and add the missing column/attribute/measure temporarily Now open the object which was previously giving error Find all references to this column, Save the object Now go ahead and delete the column from the required object. Q.What is an Analytic view? Answer: Analytic views are used to model data that includes measures. In case of multiple tables, measures must originate from only one of these tables (central table). You can model Columns, Calculated columns, Restricted columns, Variables, and Input parameters. Also you can fine-tune the attributes of an Analytic view: Can apply filter to restrict values Can be defined as Hidden so that they can be processed but not visible to end users Can be defined as key attributes and used when joining multiple tables Can be further drill down by ‘Drill Down Enable’ property You can model Aggregation type on measures You can model Currency and Unit of Measure. Q.Can we include Attribute views in Analytic view definition? Answer: Yes Q.What does the Scenario panel of Analytic view editor contains? Answer: Data Foundation: represents the tables used for defining the fact table of the view. You can specify the central table by selecting a value in ‘Central Entity’ property. Logical Join: represents the relation between fact table and attribute views to create start schema. Semantics: represents the output structure of the view. Q.What does the aggregation type ‘Calculate Before Aggregation’ mean? Answer: If you select ‘Calculate Before Aggregation’, the calculation happens as per the expression specified and then the results are aggregated as SUM, MAX, MIN, or COUNT. If it is NOT selected, the calculation happens as per the expression specified but the data is not aggregated but shown as FORMULA. Q.How to activate the other objects (required or impacted objects) along with current object? Answer: By using ‘Save and Activate All’ option in the toolbar. Q.Can you add column views to Analytic view and Calculation view? Answer: We can add column views in a Calculation view but not in the Analytic view. Q.Consider there is a table that contains product ID’s with no product description and you have a text table for products that has language specific description for each product? How can you get the language specific data? Answer: Create a text join between these two tables. The right table should be the text table and is mandatory to specify the “Language Column” in the ‘Properties’ view. Q.What are the restrictions while creating the join between the views and fact table? Answer: A table should not appear twice in any join path, i.e. Self join is not supported. While creating join between Analytic view and Attribute view the same table cannot be used in both the views. Q.What is Calculation view? Answer: Calculation view is more advanced slice of the data and can include measures from multiple source of tables, can include advanced SQL logic. The data foundation of the calculation view can include any combination of tables, column views, attribute views and analytic views. We can create joins, unions, projections, and aggregation levels on the sources. You can model Attributes, Measures, Calculated measures, Counters, Hierarchies (created outside of the attribute view), Variables and Input parameters. Q.Calculation views are modeled based on what? Answer: Graphical views or Scripted views but not as SQLScript. However there are exceptions to this rule. SQLScript with the following properties can be used in Calculation view: No input parameters Always Read-only (do not make changes to database) Side-effect free. Q.What are the option available in ‘Run With’ while creating calculation view? Answer: Definer’s Right, Invoker’s Right. Definers right: System uses the rights of the definer while executing the view or procedure for any user. Invokers right: System uses the rights of the current user while executing the view or procedure. Q.While creating a Graphical Calculation view, what are the options available in Tools palette? Answer: Union, Join, Projection, and Aggregation. Note: You can have only one source of input for Projection and Aggregation views. You can create filters on Projection and Aggregation view attributes. Q.How to create Counters in Graphical Calculation view? Answer: For example to get the number of distinct values of an attribute: Go to the Output pane, right click Counters From the context menu, choose New Choose Attribute Click ok. Q.Is it mandatory to include measures for Calculation view? Answer: No. Calculation view containing no measures works like an attribute view and is not available for reporting purposes. Q.How do you debug the Calculation view with lot of complexity at each level? Answer: By previewing the data of an intermediate node. Q.What is Mapping input parameter in Calculation view? Answer: It is used for mapping the input parameters in the underlying data sources of the calculation view with calculation view parameters. Q.In calculation view, What is the option ‘Auto Map by Name’ used for? Answer: It automatically creates the input parameters corresponding to the source and perform a 1:1 mapping. Q.What are the options available in Source input parameter? Answer: Create New Map 1:1 Map by Name Remove Mapping Q.Consider there are two tables (Actual sales and Planned sales) with similar structures. I want to see the combined data in a single view but at the same time how can I differentiate the data between these two tables Answer: Create a union view (Graphical) between the two tables and have a ‘Constant column’ indicating constant values like ‘A’ for Actual sales and ‘P’ for Planned sales. The default value for the constant column is NULL. Q.What is a Constant column and how to create it? Answer: In a Union view, a Constant column is created for the output attributes for which there is no mapping to the source attributes. To create Constant column: Right click the attribute in the target list Choose Manage Mappings To map the source to the target column, select the required source from the dropdown list To assign a default value to the constant column, enter a value in the Constant value field Select the required data type, length and scale as required Click ok. Q.What is the difference between HANA Variable and Input parameter? Answer: HANA Variables do not impact the execution and used to filter the attributes, for example we can filter a result to a specific country or product and are applied in the WHERE clause of the SQL query. HANA Input parameters used to manipulate the execution of the information model, for example currency codes or dates when exchange rates have to be calculated and are passed as PLACEHOLDER in the FROM clause of the SQL query. Q.In which configuration table you can find the variables information? Answer: You can find in _SYS_BI schema BIMC_VARIABLE BIMC_VARIABLE_ASSIGNMENT BIMC_VARIABLE_VIEW BIMC_VARIABLE_VALUE Q.What are the different types of Input parameters supported? Answer: Attribute value/Column Currency (Available in Calculation view only) Date (Available in Calculation view only) Static list Derived from Table (Available in Analytic and Graphical Calculation view) Empty Direct Type (Available in Analytic view) Q.How can you check whether an input parameter is mandatory or not? Answer: From the properties of Input parameter in the Properties pane. Q.What is Hierarchy? Answer: We create hierarchies between attributes to improve analysis by displaying attributes according to their defined relationships. There are two types of hierarchies: Level Hierarchy: The root and child nodes are accessed only in the defined order. It consists of one or more levels of aggregation. Example: We can drill down from Country to State and to City etc. Parent/Child Hierarchy: This hierarchy contains a parent attribute and constructed from a single parent attribute. Example: Employee master (employee and manager). Q.How to create an hierarchy for Analytic view? Answer: Hierarchy is not supported in Analytic view but can be used only in Attribute view and Calculation view. Q.While creating hierarchy, what does the option ‘Aggregate All Nodes’ mean? Answer: For example there is a member A with value 100, A1 with value 10, A2 with value 20 where A1 and A2 are children of A. By default the option ‘Aggregate All Nodes’ is set to false and you will see a value of 30 for A. When this option is set to true, you will count the posted value 100 for A as well and see a result of 130. Q.How can you generate a Sales report for a region in a particular currency where you have the sales data in a database table in a different currency? Answer: Create an Analytic view by selecting the table column containing the sales data and currency and perform currency conversion. Once the view is activated, we can use it to generate reports. Q.What are the factors that affect currency conversion? Answer: Currency conversion is performed based on source currency, target currency, exchange rate, and date of conversion. You can select currency from the attribute data used in the view. Currency conversion is enabled for Analytic view and Calculation views. Q.What is the prerequisite for doing the currency conversion? Answer: You need to import tables TCURC, TCURF, TCURN, TCURR, TCURT, TCURV, TCURW & TCURX. Q.What is the prerequisite for Unit of Measure? Answer: You need to import the tables T006 & T006A. Q.What happens when you activate an object? Answer: The object is exposed to repository and for analysis. Q.What is the difference between Activate and Redeploy? Answer: Activate – It deploys the inactive objects. Redeploy – It deploys the active objects. You do this when run-time object is corrupted or deleted and you want to create it again. OR when the object goes through client-level activation and server-level activation but fails at MDX, and the object status is still active. Q.What are the supported activation modes? Answer: Activate and Ignore the inconsistencies in impacted objects Stop activation in case of inconsistencies in impacted objects. Irrespective of the activation mode, if even one of the selected objects fails (either during validation or during activation), the complete activation job fails and none of the selected objects will be activated. Q.Can you explain the behavior of activation job? Answer: The status of the activation job indicates whether the activation of the objects is successful or failed. In case of failure (status is completed with errors) the process is rolled back and none of the objects are activated In the summary part the job log shows success, even in the case of failure. This is to help the user to indicate that those objects were successfully activated without any issues. When you open the job log, the summary list only shows those objects that are submitted for activation. It does not list all the affected objects. They are listed in detail section. Q.What is a Decision table? Answer: It creates related business rules in a tabular format for automating the decisions. It helps in managing business rules, data validation, data quality rules without any language knowledge. The active version of the decision table can be used in applications. You create decision table in a package just like any attribute view. You can create from scratch or from an existing decision table. Q.Where to see the detailed report of the decision table? Answer: In the ‘Job Log’ section you can see the validation status and detailed report of the decision table. 80.How to execute the decision table? The decision table is executed by calling the procedure. CALL “”.””; CALL “”.””(, …… , , ?); for Condition as parameters and Action as parameters. On execution of the procedure, if no parameters are used then physical table is updated based on the data you enter in the form of condition values and action values. Q.Are there any restrictions on Decision table to preview the data? Answer: Data preview is supported only if: Decision table is based on physical table and has at-least one parameter as action Decision table is based on Information view and parameter(s) as action. Q.How can you change the layout of a decision table? Answer: You can change the layout by arranging the condition and action columns. By default all the conditions appear as vertical columns in the decision table and you can mark a condition as a horizontal condition under the Decision table editor, choose ‘Change Layout’. Q.Can you switch ownership of objects? Answer: We can take the ownership of objects from other user’s workspace only if it is inactive version of the object Authorization required is “Work in Foreign Workspace”. The active version is owned by the user who created and activated the object. 84.What is the difference between Switch Ownership and Take Over? Switch Ownership: To take multiple inactive objects from other users. Take Over: To take single inactive object from another workspace. Q.You are working on a inactive version of a object. How can you view changes made to the active version? Answer: Select the required object in a package you are working From the context menu, choose ‘open’ In the editor pane, choose ‘Show Active Version’ Compare the active and inactive versions of the object. Q.How can you view the version history of content objects? Answer: Select the required object from the package From the context menu choose ‘History’. Q.What is Refactoring Object? Answer: Restructuring the Content objects without changing their behavior is call Refactoring. Q.What are the objects eligible for Refactoring? Answer: Packages, Attribute views, Analytic views, Graphical Calculation views, and Analytical Privileges. Q.How do you validate models? Answer: Quick launch menu → Validate From the ‘Available’ list, select the required models that system must validate. Choose Add Click Validate. Q.How do you generate the documentation for the objects you created? Answer: By using ‘Auto Documentation’ which captures the details of an information model or a package in a single document. Process to create is: Quick Launch → Auto Documentation In ‘Select Content Type’ choose ‘Model Details’ OR ‘Model List’ Add the required objects to the Target list Browse the location where you want to save the file Click finish. Q.How to identify whether an information model is referenced by any other information model? Answer: We can check the model references by using ‘Where Used’. Process is: Go to the package Select the required object From the context menu, choose ‘Where Used’. Q.What is the difference among Raw Data, Distinct values and Analysis while doing the Data Preview? Answer: Raw Data : It displays all attributes along with data in tabular format. Distinct Values: It displays all attributes along with data in graphical format. Analysis : It displays all attributes and measures in graphical format. Q.What are the different types of functions can be used in expressions? Answer: Conversion, String, Mathematical, Date and Misc functions. if(”SCORE” > 7, “SELECTED”, IF(”SCORE” > 4, “ONHOLD”, “REJECTED”)); returns REJECTED if the SCORE is

SAP Hybris Interview Questions

Q.How To Run Multiple Hybris Instance In One Machine? Ans: Basically hybrid runs on a tomcat instance. Hybris is shipped with a bundled tomcat. So the question here is actually, how to run multiple tomcat in one machine. We can run as many hybris we want, till our machine memory permits. To do so, we need to make each instance of tomcat to have it’s own ports to use. Make below ports unique for each instance. We should add below properties in local property file of each instance with unique values.. tomcat.http.port=7001 tomcat.ssl.port=7002 tomcat.ajp.port=7009 tomcat.jmx.port=7003 tomcat.jmx.server.port=7004 Q.Why Order Is Important In Items.xml? Ans : We need to follow an order in items.xml, when we declare item types in items.xml. Below are the reasons for it. Each items.xml is parsed in single pass. This means, more specific types are dependent on general types. In such case they should have been defined before we use them. For example, Here we see that, item type product is using other item types, like catalog. To make this file successfully, it is mandatory that catalog exist before product is declared. We must defines types in order of inheritance. NOTE: Impex files are parsed in multiple pass, so order is not important there. Each xml file is validated against a items.xsd during build. If the xml file does not conforms to xsd file, build will fail. Q.What Is Role Of Jalosession? Ans: The Jalo layer in hybris is depreacted, not the jalosession. Whenever a request is made to hybris server, it may need current user details, currency, language, timezone etc to serve that request efficiently. Since HttpSession does not hold all these details, hybris came up with the concept of JaloSession. Whenever a request comes to Hybris, the filter HybrisInitFilter creates an object of JaloSession. Every JaloSession object is associated with a SessionContext object, which has current user, language, currency etc and the current httpSession object. Cron jobs also run in a JaloSession. Each JaloSession is bound to a tenant. This cannot be changed, after the instance of JaloSession is created. JaloSession is never made persistent in database. Q.What Are Model Attributes? Ans: Some time it is necessary to get few data in many JSPs, and we don’t want to pass them as a part of DTO (data objects). For example, the titles (Mr and Mrs etc). They can be used in many JSPs and tags file, like registration, delivery address etc. In such cases, what we do is, create a convenient method in Abstract controllers, and use model attribute annotation for them. In this way they are available from all JSPs directly using model attribute. These can be accessed directly in JSPs or even tag files. like Current Language : ${current Language} Model service create method vs new operator When we try to create a new instances of an item type programmatically, we have two options, using the java way, using new operator or the hybris way, using the model service. ProductModel product1 = new ProductModel(); ProductModel product2 = modelService.create(ProductModel.class); The advantages of using model service method are below: The model service create method will generate and assign the pk for product object. The create method will initialize the default values, defined in items.xml for mandatory attributes. While calling save all method, the object is already attached to context, and will be saved. While product1 needs to attach explicitly. So we should always go for model service way in hybris. Q.Why Models Are Generated In Platform Extensions? Ans: Hybris is build over the concepts of extensions. Each extension has it’s own data model. Any extension can use an item type from other extension and extend it as per requirement. For example, the itemtype product defined in core extension. The catalog extension has extended the product itemtype, and added vendor to it. While building the hybris, the frameworks builds according to dependencies. Since core is build before catalog extension, it is not aware of the vendor attribute defined in catalog extension. If we keep model class in extensions, then there will e chance of build failures. Like in our case, vendor attribute will not find a place in Product Model class. Hybris build framework, creates model classes, even before, building any extension. The platform is the best place to keep them, as every extension is built upon it only. So it is not logical to create model classes in particular extensions, when we can define same data model in various extension. Q.How To Split An Order Into Multiple Consignment? Ans : While fulfilling an order, some time it is necessary for business to split the order into multiple orders. For instance, a customer orders two items A and B, now A has delivery window of 2 days, while B can be delivered in minimum 5 days. Now business has the option to either ship both items in 5 days. But what if item A is fresh, and will get destroyed in 5 days. There may be a case, where customer wants a mandatory delivery of item A within 2 days. In such situations, if business house doesn’t want to loose customer, it has no choice but to split order and ship it multiple times. This is the case of split consignment. Now there may be various conditions, which may call for splitting the order into multiple consignments. Above example is just one of them. For example, we may want to split consignment, based on warehouse from where item will be picked up. We may want to split consignment, based on product type (fresh or ambient) etc. These situations which decides the business logic to be a case for splitting the consignments, are known as splitting strategies. We can have as many as strategy to split, as we want. By default, hybris creates only one consignment for an order. This is done by following service. As you can see, that the order Splitting Service accepts a list of strategies, we can create many strategies, and split our order. The actual business logic for splitting will go into strategy class. Q.How To Setup A Svn Environment For Hybris Projects? Ans: Maintaining a version system for any project is one of the most crucial aspect. Hybris projects are not special in this regard. They also do have the same life cycle in terms of development. We need to maintain different environments like SIT, UAT etc. To provide a local development environment is also equally important. Since the size of OOB Hybris is huge, it is difficult to put everything in SVN (or GIT). Also it is not advisable. The hybris is improvising every day. A new release should not give us pain in terms of development. The best practice for versioning a hybris project could be: Put only custom folder, containing customized extensions to versioning software. Pass latest local.properties, local extensions locally to each developers. Maintain copy of latest local.properties, local extensions in each of servers like development and SIT, UAT etc. Hybris software is wrapped around custom folder on each environment. Media folder could possibly in SVN or can be passed locally like property files. production environment, normally is not connected to SVN. Rather we take the most stable copy from UAT and deploy it using some deployment tool like , bamboo. These core tutorials will help you to learn the fundamentals of Tableau. For an in-depth understanding and practical experience, explore SAP Hybris Training. Q.What Are Catalog Aware Item Types? Ans: While creating a data model for your project, you might come across situations, where you might want some of your item types to be part of catalog. This means, you want them to synchronize, you want them to be associated with a catalog, content or product. Such item types are known as catalog aware. It’s not just CMS item types or products, that needs synchronization. All OOB CMS items and products are catalog aware. To explicitly make an item type to be catalog aware, follow below steps: Mark your item as catalog item type, using custom property catalog ItemType. Choose attribute from item, which will qualify the catalog associated using custom property catalog Version Attribute Qualifier. Since each item in a catalog must be unique, we need to choose an attribute from item which is unique. This can be done using custom property unique Key Attribute Qualifier. java.lang.Boolean.TRUE ”catalogVersion” ”code” Once updating your item type, you should update your platform, using system update. And you should see something like below in HMC > System > item types > My ItemType > Extended Now, instances of this itemtype will be catalog aware, and would be part of synchronization. Q.Will It Perform If We Have Over 1 Million Skus? Ans: Yes, if you have used APIs, flexi search in a right way. If you have used pagination in your flexi search and converter caches than it will not matter how much SKUs you have. Q.Is It Scalable? Ans: Hybris is spring JEE based platform and it is as scalable as any other java based platform. Adding new cluster node is just a matter of starting a new Hybris instance with 3 property changes. Hybris will automatically add that node in cluster. It has distributed cache per server and it’s out of the box cache invalidation over UDP is very much efficient. Q.Is It Configurable Or Require Deployment For All Sort Of Changes? Ans: Mostly configuration until you has not done your own customizations. Even you can expose your custom elements to hmc and from there you can also change your configuration on the fly. Q.How Easy It Is To Migrate From Existing Magento Or Custom Ecommerce Solution To Hybris Platform? Ans: It will depend but highly feasible. Their data import process is very much flexible. Once data mapping is done it is easy to migrate. Q.How Secure It Is? Ans : Spring security is integrated OOB. Q.How Easy To Learn This? Ans : Actually if you know spring and has concept of basic ecommerce than not much effort required to learn Hybris platform. You need to be familiar with impex and flexi search syntax but plenty of examples are available to learn this Q.Do They Have On Demand Flavor Also? Ans: Yes, recently introduced as an offering. Q.Can We Use Hybris For Product Enrichment Also? Ans: Yes, their PIM module is meant for this. Q.How You Will Compare This With Atg Or Wcs? Ans: Very soon Hybris will be on top of these because of its simplicity. Q.Can We Use This As A Fully Fledged Content Management Solution? Ans: No, if your site is very much specific to content management and you want to manage specific version of -individual content than wcms is not the right solution for you. Otherwise it has all features that are required for an ecommerce application. Q.How Flexible Promotion Module Is? Ans: Lot many promotions are available out of the box and you can extend their framework very easily to introduce your custom promotion. Q.Please Talk About Search Capabilities? Ans: Google commerce search over cloud. What else I need to say. If GCS doesn’t suits to you then use SOLR as a free solution. It is available OOB. Q.What Integration Topologies It Provides? Ans : Whatever you want….pre-integrated ActiveMQ on tomcat is available for messaging. Restful web services frameworks are available OOB. Q.Does It Have Business Processing Capabilities Also? Ans: Yes, limited but you can define your workflows. Moreover you can modify your workflow decisions on the fly through hmc. Contact for More On SAP Hybris Online Training

SAP MM Interview Questions

Q.What is the difference between the stock transfer between two plants belonging to same company code and those belonging to different company code? Answer: A stock transfer from plant to plant generally takes place within a company code. It can, however, also take place between two company codes, if the plants are assigned to different valuation areas, which belong to different company codes. Unlike a stock transfer from storage location to storage location, a stock transfer from plant to plant affects both accounting and Materials Planning, as follows: Accounting:Accounting is affected if both plants are assigned to different valuation areas. This means that a stock transfer leads not only to a quantity update but also to a value update (stock value, G/L accounts). Thus, parallel to the material document for stock transfer, an accounting document is created. Materials Planning:Materials planning are affected because a change of plant stock is taken into account by Materials Planning Q.What are the important fields in purchasing view? Answer: RFQ/Quotation Purchase requisition Purchase order Master data (Info record, Source list, Conditions, Vendors etc.) Outline agreements Q.What are the steps in automatic account assignment configuration? Answer: Material type is assigned to A/c Cat Ref.; A/c Cat. Ref is assigned to Val. Class; Val. class assigned to G/L A/c. Configuration: OMWM : Activate Val. grouping Code OMSK : Create A/c cat. ref and Val. Class; then A/c cat ref assigned to material type. OMWD : Val. area (plant) assigned to Val. grp. code (0001) OBYC : Assign Val. modifier (0001), New Val. Class and G/L A/c Now create new material and assign new val. class in Accounting 1 data screen. Then create PO, GR. Q.How do you create movement types? What are the steps involved? When will you recommend a new movement type? Answer: Transaction code is OMJJ You can copy new movement type which is near-by old one. When we go to new movement type, if there is no possibility to done transaction with old movement type. Steps: 1) entry control data 2) short text 3) allowed transactions 4)help text 5)up date control data 6)account grouping 7)reasons for movement Q.What is meant by access sequence? When it is used? Answer: Condition type has an access sequence assigned to it which determines which tables to access for data and in what sequence. This has a sequence of table based on the most specific to most generic. It can be used for any new condition type creation. Q.How does the PO pick up the pricing schema? Answer: The pricing procedure assigned to a vendor has a calculation schema attached to it. This schema defines the various conditions pre-requisite, calculation & sequence in the PO. Generally, only one type of pricing procedure is followed for all the vendors. Q.What are the steps involved in creating a pricing procedure? Answer: To create a pricing procedure, the steps will be Create Condition tables Create access sequence by placing the different condition tables from most specific to the most general. Create the condition types Assign the Access sequence to the condition type Create the pricing procedure Place the all condition types in a sequential order as per the business requirement and pricing needs. Q.What are the types of special stocks available? Answer: Consignment stock - vendor Components provided to vendor Project stock Consignment stock customer Pipeline material Orders on hand Q.What are the types of info records? Answer: Standard Pipeline Consignment Subcontracting Q.What is meant by consignment stock? Answer: Consignment stock is the material which is lying in the premises but is not owned by the Vendor. It has no value assigned to it until it is taken into own stock. Once it is used in production or to be sold, it is taken into own stock. Q.What are the steps involved in consignment cycle? Answer: Consignment cycle is similar to a standard purchase cycle. The difference it that no accounting document is created at the time of goods receipts only qty is updated. It is settled once the same is utilized. Q.Tell me about the subcontracting cycle. Answer: When the material is sent for subcontracting i.e. some value addition, it is converted into a different material. It needs a BOM to define the components of the finished item being received. Q.How is scrap accounted in subcontracting? Answer: When the material is sent for subcontracting i.e. some value addition, it is converted into a different material. It needs a BOM to define the components of the finished item being received. The scrap or the process loss can be adjusted while doing a quality inspection of the material received after subcontracting. Q.How are the byproducts taken care of in subcontracting? Answer: products can be taken care of by defining them in the BOM. Q.Tell me about the various movement types and usage. Answer: 101 GR in unrest. Use 103 GR in Blocked stock 105 Release from Block to Unrest. Use stock. 122 Return to vendor from unrest. Use stock. 124 Return to vendor from blocked stock 301 Plant to Plant transfer. 309 Material to Material transfer 311 Transfer from stg loc to stg loc 261 Issue for consumption 411 Taking consignment stock into own stock 551 Withdrawal for scrapping Q.What is meant by scales? Can scales be used in standard purchase order? Answer: By using scales we can fix the price of a material accordingly, for example, we can fix the material price. Based on the quantity like For quantity 1 to 100 price is Rs1000 For quantity 101 to 200 price is 900 Like that, you can fix price. A scheduling agreement can be made for Consignment, Subcontracting & stock transfer. A contract, also known as a blanket PO, can be made for standard items and can be restricted to a Value or Qty. Based on the calculation schema of that condition & based on access sequence assigned to it. Condition type in the standard system: Non-deductible input tax = NAVS Depending on the tax code in the PO item and the tax calculation schema, the system calculates the non-deductible tax portion and inserts it in the condition type with the category N. The condition type has the calculation rule "absolute amount". Normally, the access sequence that regulates tax code determination is assigned to the condition type. Q.What is the difference between a Purchase Requisition and a Purchase Order? Answer: A PR is an internal document that sends notification to purchase department when some material is service is required. PR can be generated by department that needs any material or service. A PO is a document sent to vendor by purchaser which is an official request of mentioned material or services. POs are generally binding on purchaser, though it depends on terms and conditions mentioned in PO. Q.What are different Info Records types? Answer: Different Info Record types are Standard, Consignment, Sub-Contracting and Pipeline. Q.What is a consignment Stock? Answer: The stock supplied by the vendor is in the purchasing company’s premises but the company has no liability for the same. The liability for the company will only arise one the goods are issued from the consignment stock for use. However, in this case, even before the use, purchasing company can check in system how much stock is lying in inventory. Q.What is Sub-Contracting cycle in MM? Answer: In Sub-contracting, we send raw material or input material to sub-contractor and then receive the finished goods. A sub-contracting PO is created with item category ‘L’. Input material is sent to vendor for processing with movement type 541. When GR is done using movement type 101, movement type 543 takes place automatically and takes care of consumed material. Q.What is meant by Scales in MM? Answer: When we maintain price in Info Records, we can make use of scales. It is used when price of a material is dependent on quantity purchased. For eg. For 500 pieces of material ABC, price is Rs. 10, however, if the order quantity is more than 500, price is Rs. 9. Scales are maintained in various master data like info record, quota arrangement etc. from where scales can be pulled in a Purchase Order. Q.How to Flag a material for deletion? Answer: A material must be flagged for deletion before deleting it using Archive and Delete program. A deletion flag can be set at client level, plant level or storage location level. Whatever level you flag a material for deletion, it is flagged for deletion at all corresponding lower levels. Transaction MM06 is used to flag a material for deletion. Q.Can a material be used after flagging it for deletion? Answer: Yes, even after flagging a material for deletion, it can be used till it is actually deleted. It will just trigger a warning message whenever the material is used. If you want a material to be blocked for any use with immediate effect, you should use a material status which is there in Basic View 1 for general level or in MRP 1 view for plant level blocking. Q.What is the function of OBYC? Answer: OBYC is t-code used for configuring Automatic Account Posting. Postings are made to G/L accounts automatically in the case of Inventory Management and Invoice Verification relevant to Financial and Cost Accounting. Q.What is valuation grouping code related to OBYC? Answer: Valuation grouping code is used to group the valuation area, In SAP, we can have valuation level at Company code level or at plant level. General practice is to use the valuation area at plant level, because valuation may differ from one plant to another. The valuation grouping code makes it easier to set automatic account determination. If we need to define common account determination for several valuation areas, we can assign same valuation grouping code to all those valuation areas. We can maintain the valuation group code in OMWD for various valuation areas. Q.What types of special stocks are available? Answer: Various special stock types available in SAP are Consignment, Subcontracting, pipeline, project, sales order stock, Returnable transport packaging, stock transfer, and the third party. Q.What is the difference between Contracts and Scheduling Agreements? Answer: A contract is a pre-determined long term agreement to supply material or service for a certain period of time. Specific delivery dates are not mentioned in the contracts. Contracts can be of two types: Value Contract or Quantity contract In Scheduling agreements, we can enter scheduling lines which gives details of quantity that should be delivered on specific date. Plant must be entered in SA so that materials can be delivered at plant. These are generally used for materials whose requirements are predictable. Q.How can we create new transaction codes in SAP? Answer: New transaction codes can be created using t-code SE93. Q.What are release procedures with and without classification? Answer: Release Strategy with Classification: PR can be released at header level as well as item level. It can be used for both internal/external documents. Can be set on any field available in structure CEBAN Release Strategy without Classification: PR can be released only at item level. It can be used only for internal documents such as PR. This strategy can be used only on 4 parameters which are Account assignment category, Plant, Material Group and value of PR. Q.What is meant by batches? Answer: A batch is a subset of the total stock of a material. It represents a homogeneous unit which has unique specification. Normally, a batch is assigned to the quantity of material produced during a given production run. A batch number uniqueness can be assigned at any of the following 3 levels: At client level: The same batch number can be assigned only once within the entire client. At material and plant combination level: Same batch number can be assigned to material with different specification in each plant. At material number level: A batch assigned to a material has the same specification for all plants where material is extended. Batch number can be reassigned with a different specification for each material. Q.How to handle free items in PO? Answer: While creating PO, we can tick the item as free item in item overview section of PO. The price will be zero for free marked item. Q.What information is maintained in Accounting View of material master? Answer: Accounting view is a plant specific view. Besides other information, it contains important information such as valuation class and price control. Valuation class helps in determining the relevant GL account used for account posting. It is also used while configuring OBYC settings. Price control indicator determines if material is maintained at Standard price(S) or Moving average price (V). Q.What is the use of Material types? Answer: ‘Material Types’ is used to group various materials based on some common properties. It helps in maintain material master data for a particular material. Using material types, we can control which all views are required for a material type, which fields are required or optional, the material number range etc. Q.What is the use of ‘Partner Functions’ for a vendor? Answer: Partner Function is used to define responsibilities and duties of other business partners. Some partner functions are AZ(Alternate payee), CR(Carrier), OA(Ordering address), GS(Goods supplier), PI(Invoice presented by) etc. Q.What is the use of ‘Material Status’? Answer: Material Status helps in determining the usability of a material. It is a 2-digit code which can be maintained as plant specific material status, cross-plant material status, and distribution material status. Q.What is the ‘Price Control Indicator’? Answer: ‘Price Control Indicator’ is maintained in accounting view and is used to determine how a material will be valuated. It can be Standard Price(S) or Moving Average Price(V). If the indicator is set to S, all inventory postings are posted at standard price maintained in material master. If there are variances in any transaction due to different price, the variance is posted in price difference account. If price control indicator is set at V, goods received will be done at GR price. The moving average price will be adjusted in material master using weighted average formula. If goods movements or invoice receipts are posted using a price that differs from the moving average price, the differences are posted to the stock account. Q.What are various types of Stock transfer? Answer: The physical movement of stock between different physical locations is called as ‘Stock transfer’. Stock transfer can be either a single step process or a two-step process. Various Stock transfers are: Inter Company (Company to Company) Inter Plant/Intra Company (Plant to Plant) Intra Plant (Storage location to Storage location) Q.What are various Stock Types? Answer: In SAP, commonly used stock types are: Unrestricted Stock (Stock that is available for use) Restricted Stock Quality Inspection Stock (Not the unrestricted stock but can be considered for MRP) Blocked Stock (Stock rejected by quality or production) GR Blocked Stock (Conditionally accepted stock. Not the unrestricted stock) Q.What are various procedures for counting Physical Inventory? Answer: Physical Inventory procedures in SAP MM are as follows: Periodic Inventory (All stocks are counted on a pre-determined date) Continuous Inventory (stocks are counted continuously during the entire fiscal year) Cycle Counting (Counting is done at fixed intervals) Inventory Sampling (Randomly selected material stocks are physically counted on the balance sheet key date. If variances are small enough, it is presumed that the book inventory balances for the other stocks are correct.) Q.What are the various functions /features in Purchasing? Answer: The purchasing view consists of RFQ / Quotation, Purchase Requisition (PR), Purchase Order (PO), Master Data that has several fields like info record, source list, conditions, vendors etc. and finally Outline Agreements. Q.What are the different kinds of special stocks available? Answer: Special stocks available are consignment stocks (from vendor), subcontracting stocks (to sun-contractor), project stocks, pipeline materials, sales order stocks, stock transfer and third party. Q.How do you create a pricing procedure? Answer: The steps involved in creating a pricing procedure are: 1. Create condition tables 2. Create access sequence according to the various condition tables 3. Create condition types 4. Assign access sequence to condition type 5. Create the pricing procedure 6. List down all the condition types in order so as to suit the business and pricing requirements Q.How does the consignment cycle operate? Answer: The various steps in consignment cycle are: 1. Create consignment info record with proper tax code 2. Create Purchase order with item category K 3. Create output condition record for KONS (output type) 4. Authorize Goods Receipt (GR) 5. Payment is settled through MRKO transaction even if invoice verification is not done Q.What are the kinds of info records available? Answer: Standard, consignment, subcontracting and pipeline Q.What is the difference between a contract and scheduling agreement? Answer: While a scheduling agreement is for consignment, subcontracting and stock transfer, a contract is for Standard items and can be limited to a certain quantity or value. A contract can be created centrally with different pricing conditions for every plant whereas a scheduling agreement needs to be created at that particular plant location. In a contract, only time-dependent conditions can be created whereas in a scheduling agreement, you can have time-dependent or time-independent conditions subject to the customizations in the document type. Q.What is MRP? And how is Lot Size used? Answer: MRP is short for Materials Requirements Planning and it is a production planning technique that’s used to manage the manufacturing process. It is basically used to determine your Material Planning procedure by specifying the various conditions like Reorder Point, Seasonal Requirement, Replenishment, Vendor Managed, Forecast Based and Master Production Scheduling (MPS). Lot size specifies the nature of material requirement in terms of Weekly, Monthly, Quantity and Maximum Replenishment. Q.What are batches and how are they searched? Answer: A batch is a collection of similar items from your stock that have the same characteristics. For example, all food items produced on a particular day belong to one batch. Batches are searched using the standard facility (match code, key F4) based on the batch names or other properties that distinguish them from others. Q.How is shelf life managed in SAP? Explain the full-cycle. Answer: In SAP, there are basically two types of shelf-life: 1. Total Shelf Life – In case the total shelf life is maintained, then it’s mandatory to enter the minimum shelf life also. During the process of Goods Receipt (GR), the user will have to enter the manufactured date of the item so that the expiry date is automatically calculated by the system. 2. Minimum Shelf Life – The date of minimum durability of the item are specified by using date markings like ‘use-by’ or ‘best-before’. During the process of Goods Receipt (GR), the user will have to enter the date of GR so that the system can check if the material is usable according to the requirements in material master. If the minimum remaining shelf life condition is not satisfied, then the system will not accept the goods receipt. Q.What is a release strategy? What are release groups and codes? Answer: The procurement process in SAP needs to be controlled by introducing authorizations at important stages. This is taken care by the release strategy, which has different codes for assigned users. For example, if the value of a PO is more than a certain pre-defined limit, then it has to be approved by the SCM manager with a certain release code. Every company will have different approval mechanisms and the release strategy can be defined by the users. Release groups are a set of release codes that are used for authorizing a purchasing document or approving a release strategy. Release code is a 2-character ID that allows a person to approve or clear a PR or a PO and they are controlled by a step-by-step authorization system. For example, Code 10 is assigned to the person who creates the PO, Code 20 is the release code assigned to the Purchase manager for approval. Subsequently, the Department Head will use Code 30 to approve the release strategy, followed by the Operations Director, who will use Code 40 for final approval. Q.What is a GR blocked stock and when is it used? Answer: The GR blocked stock is an option used in the goods receipt process when you are not sure about the quality of the goods received. In such a case, the stock is maintained as GR blocked either from a material viewpoint or exclusively for a purchase order item. Q.EXPLAIN BATCH MANAGEMENT? Answer: The reason for Batch Management are 1.Defect tracking, 2.Call back activities used for hazardous materials, chemicals & pharma. Batch levels : 1.Plant 2.Material 3.Client SAP recommends plant level in SPRO We have to set characteristics ie. Properties class type: -022 at plant level, -023 at client level We can use split valuation for batches if the value based IM. The Batch No. is valuation type To indicate whether a batch is usable or not In customizing we can activate batch status management Level AUTO à client (or) Material MANUAL à Plant (selected) Status Unrestricted can be used & Restricted cannot be used. SLED = Total shelf life + Production Date in GR If no data in Material Master we have to enter at GR. contact for more on SAP MM Online Training

SAP PP Interview Questions

Q.In SAP which is the highest organizational level? Answer:The highest organizational level in SAP is Client. Q.In Level code 0001/0002 etc can the MRP be carried out for one particular level? Answer:Yes, in level code 0001/0002 MRP can be carried out for one particular level. Q.For SAP PP module what are the cutover activities followed? Answer:The following are some of the cut over activities that are to be followed for PP Discrete Manufacturing: Production Planning/ Master Data: In PP only master data shall be migrated to SAP; there is no master data in the first stage. The elements that are related to PP in the master data are Bill of Materials, Routing and Work Centers. Transaction Data: As per the cut off date, ideally there should not be any work in process, all the open production orders should be closed and semi finished goods would be dismantled and should be added to Raw materials. This strategy should be followed for all production order where lead time to complete the production order is not large. Since, the production orders are for longer duration and it is not possible to dismantle the product and add it to inventory, following can be the strategy to migrate the data to SAP It create a material master for the work in process and set the standard price as the cost incurred for that product (Work in process), create a bill of material, which will be used only for this production order including this material and other materials still to be consumed. It creates Routing for rest of the production process. Bring the work in process material into inventory as of the cut off date. It creates the production orders in SAP for the Work in process and issue materials to production order. Q.Which is the highest organizational level for Material Master Record PP Data? Answer:The highest Organizational level for Material Master Record PP Data is Plant. Q.What would be the result to plan after it has been converted into production order? Answer: When the Planned order is converted to Production order the planned order are offset by production order, with reference of planned order can be seen in the production order. Q.What are the requirements for PIR, Sales Order, and Customer Requirement are reduced after they are produced? Answer:After the Delivery is made to the Particular Order in case of strategy 11, the PIR are consumed after the GR for Production Order are the requirements which are reduced automatically. Q.What is the difference between F1 Help and F4 Help? Answer:F1 Help is used for field help and whereas F4 is used for possible entries. Q.Is it possible to attach a drawing for a material to BOM and what is the process? Answer:Yes, it’s possible to attach a drawing for a material to BOM and coming to the process create a document using Transaction Code CV01N Create Document and attach the drawing in that document. Then the system will automatically generate a document number and then assign this document in the BOM with item category D. Q.Is it possible to assign one material to more than one operation in a routing? Answer:No, one material from a BOM cannot be assigned to different operations, but it can be done by defining the material for so many times as required in the BOM. Q.Where is the Variant Configuration typically used? Answer:The Variant Configuration is typically used at Make-to-Stock Environment. Q.What is the procedure to insert an inspection checkpoint at the end of an operation? Answer: The procedure to insert an inspection is by defining it in the process sample, assign inspection type 03 in the Material Master then create MIC and assign them in the Routings. Then the system automatically generates the Inspection Lots. Q.What is used to generate reports in SAP for a list of material requirements from LTP? Answer: To generate the reports for the list of material required for LTP is by using MS70 and then use MCEC. Q.What is the parameter used to specify the teardown time in one operation? Answer:The teardown time in one operation can be defined by one of the Standard Parameter. Q.How to get planned orders scheduled for scheduling planned order for capacity leveling? Answer:The planned orders scheduled for scheduling planned order while running MRP, by selecting 2 in the scheduling box this will bring planned orders into CM01 and CM02. Q.When both labor, Machine categories exist how does process time is calculated in WC? Answer:When both labor, Machine categories exist scheduling is done based on the Capacity Category it is defined at Work center. Q.General Data that contains in Basic Data Screen are? Answer:General data that contains in basic data screen are Material Number, Material Description and Base Unit of Measure. Q.How to navigate for creating object dependencies in a BOM for configurable materials? Answer:Navigation for creating object dependencies in a BOM is for configurable materials is Go to Extras>Object Dependency>Assign. Q.Explain me why work scheduling view is required for semi finished and finished products? Answer:Work Schedule view is required for semi finished and finished products because all the details are mentioned in MRP views and they are also available for production for scheduler and production scheduler profile in this view, if not maintained conversion of planned order to production will not be possible. Q.Which transaction code is used for creating material master? Answer:MM01 is the transaction code for creating material master. Q.What is the procedure when a program is run for capacity planning Transaction code CM01 and where the plan orders are not included in the pegged requirements, even checked the profile and the check box for order and plan order are all activated? Answer:When the planned orders have been created without capacity requirement indicator in MRP “2” lead time scheduling, in such case they would be converted to process orders they will have impact on the resource. If the planned orders, re-run the MRP or change in every planned order, going to the menu and edit the Scheduling. Another possibility is to do with routing/work centers used and whether it is actually calculates consumption of capacity of the category at the work center being displayed in CM 01, it may consume a capacity pool or it may not consume the category. Q.What is Batch? Answer:The partial quantity of material managed separately from other quantity of same material in stock is called Batch. Q.How to delete a group of products that are created in Screen MC84 and group of products? Answer:The product group is created as a material master record with material type PROD and this record is deleted in SARA and the members deleted in the product group and then archive the product group in transaction SARA. Object MM_MATNR. Q.Which component in BOM is allocated to operation? Answer:Routing is the component in BOM which is allocated to operation. Q.What is the procedure for MPS in Back ground online when it was run for a plant either ways? Answer:MPS in Back ground online was run for a plant in either ways it would run MPS for a single material/plant, if it does not work it need to run a planning file and a consistency check first, transaction OMDO and MDRE respectively it require to set up two jobs to do it but it is straight forward, once it was done this set up the back ground job MPS to run and do it in NEUPL first time round and then change to NETCH after that. Q.In which unit the stock keeping is done in a company? Answer:The Stock keeping in a company is done at Base unit of measure. Q.What is the output of MPS run? Answer:MPS is run to plan the materials which are of 'A' type in the abc analysis (80% dollar value) that have to be planned before. MPS is also a type of MRP only in which components just below the materials on which MPS run is taken place, are planned. Q.Where BOM does always created? Answer:BOM is always created at Single Level. Q.List some components of BOM? Answer:Components of BOM are List of Components, Quantity of Components and Unit of Measure of Components. Q.How does SAP know that an operation has components as indicated by the component allocation indicator? Answer:Component allocation is done by routing maintenance or BOM maintenance for the assembly. This is master data maintenance. As soon as a PO is created, the master data is read into the PO. Q.In which table the planning values are maintained in MC93 transaction? Answer:The planning values that are maintained by using transaction code MC95 to display the entries and the table are S076. Q.Can MRP be carried out for one particular level of a bom ( Level code : 0001/0002 etc). Answer: Yes it can be done by running for specific materials (Single Material Single Level) SAP PP Interview Questions and Answers SAP PP Interview Questions Q.How Requirements ( PIR,Sles Order, Customer Requirement) are reduced after they are produced? Answer: Requirements are reduced automatically after Delivery is made to the Particular Order (In case of Strategy 11, the PIRs are consumed after the GR for Production Order) Q.Can't one material be assigned to more than one operation in a routing? Answer:One material from a BOM CANNOT be assigned to different Operations. It can be done by defining the material for so many times as required in the BOM Q.How to insert an inspection checkpoint at the end of an operation? Answer: If in process sample is to be defined, assign inspection type 03 in the Material Master. Then create MICs and assign them in the Routings. System automatically generates the Inspection Lots Q.Where we have to specify the teardown time in one operation? Answer: Teardown time can be defined as one of the Standard Parameters... Q.How the process time is calculated in a WC when both labour, Machine categories exist? Answer:Scheduling is done based on the Capacity Category we define in the Workcenter Q.What are Traffic Lights in MRP? Answer:red = the stock is not available yellow - the stock is in average level stock green = the stock is available Q.What is MRP List and what is the use of it? Answer:Definition of the MRP List The system creates MRP lists during the planning run according to how you set the creation indicator. These lists contain the planning result for the material. The MRP list always displays the stock/requirements situation at the time of the last planning run and it also provides a work basis for the MRP controller. Changes that are made after the planning date are not taken into consideration, so the list is static. MRP lists are stored in the system until they are either deleted manually or replaced by new lists from a subsequent planning run. Q.What is the use of Stock Requirement List? Answer:In the stock/requirements list, the most up-to-date stock and requirements situation is displayed. The main difference between the MRP list and the stock/requirements list is that each time the stock/requirements list is called up, the system selects the various MRP elements and displays the most up-to-date situation. You thus always see the current availability situation of the material in the stock/requirements list. Changes that are made after the planning date are displayed directly, so the list is therefore dynamic. Stock/requirements lists are not saved in a fixed state in the system, but are subject to change and only exist in the working memory. Comparison The screen layout of both lists is basically the same. The system automatically runs the rescheduling check directly when both lists are created and puts forward rescheduling proposals. The number of exception messages displayed in each list is roughly the same. The only difference lies in the fact that, due to the nature of the list, no exception messages can occur for newly planned MRP elements in the stock/requirements list. Directly after the planning run, both lists contain the same information. As soon as a change relevant to MRP is made, the system updates the information in the stock/requirements list. As stock/requirements lists are subject to change, they cannot be set with a processing indicator. Q.What is MRP controller Means? Answer:The MRP controller is a person or a group of persons responsible for monitoring material availability. You can use the number entered here, for example, to select the planning results per MRP conroller. Every material that is relevant to the planning run must be assigned an MRP controller number in the material master record. You can also determine a special person for backorder processing who receives a mail if a goods receipt was posted for a missing part. You must enter the mail name of this person in the field entitled, recipient name. In addition, you can define a person or a group of persons, who are to informed if you send a mail from the MRP list or stock/requirements list to the MRP controller for the material displayed. Actions Q.What is MRP group and what is the use of it? Answer:MRP Groups In this step, you can carry out the total maintenance of the MRP groups and you can allocate a material type to an MRP group. The MRP group is an organizational object that can be used to allocate special control parameters for planning to a group of materials. You can maintain MRP groups if planning control per plant is not precise enough for your requirements and you want to allocate certain material groups different control parameters from the plant parameters. For this purpose, MRP groups are defined with these specific control parameters and are assigned to the material in the material master record (MRP 1 screen). For example, the following control parameters can be set for the total planning run: the creation indicator for the plarequisitions, MRP lists, and so on) the planning horizon the consumption mode The following is valid for total planning and single-item planning: for all materials without an MRP group, the system uses the plant parameters, or the entries in the initial screen of the planning run for all materials with an MRP group, the system uses the parameters recorded in the MRP groupnning run (creation of purchase Q.What is Purpose of Schedule Margin Key? Answer:In this step, you specify the floats for determining the basic dates of the planned orders. The floats are allocated to the material via the release period key in the material master record. Opening period The opening period represents the number of workdays that are subtracted from the order start date in order to determine the order creation date. This time is used by the MRP controller as a float for converting planned orders into purchase requisitions or into production orders. Float before production The float before production represents the number of workdays that are planned as a float between the order start date (planned start date) and the production start date (target start date). On the one hand, this float is intended to guarantee that delays in staging a material do not delay the production start. On the other hand, the production dates can be brought forward by means of the float to cope with capacity bottlenecks. Float after production The float after production should provide a float for the production process to cope with any disruptions so that there is no danger that the planned finish date will be exceeded. You plan the float after production between order finish date (planned finish date) and scheduled end (target finish date). Release period The release period represents the number of workdays that are subtracted from the order start date in order to determine the production order release. The release period is only relevant for production order management. Q.What is opening period? Answer: The opening period represents the number of workdays that are subtracted from the order start date in order to determine the order creation date. This time is used by the MRP controller as a float for converting planned orders into purchase requisitions or into production orders. Q.What is SLA ? Service Level Agreements Answer: Service Level Agreements (SLA) define the attributes for service products (for example, maintenance, Hotline) that have been agreed upon with the customer in service contracts. The SLA confirms different parameters, such as response time, availability time and system availability. Q.What are Basic Dates? Answer: Earliest date for the execution of the production order. This date takes into account the float before production. If, on order creation, a planned order exists for the production order or process order, then the order dates are taken from the planned order. When scheduling the production order the system tries to adhere to the order dates (if necessary, with reduction measures). If it is not possible to adhere to the basic dates and if the control parameter in Customizing allows the basic dates to be adjusted, the system adjusts the basic dates of the order during the scheduling run. If the control parameter in Customizing does not allow the basic dates to be adjusted, the order keeps the basic dates of the planned order. If the production order is created manually, you must enter at least one order date manually. The scheduling type determines, which order dates you must enter. Q.What is planning time fence? Answer: The planning time fence specifies a period within which no automatic changes are to be made to the master plan. The planning time fence is maintained in workdays. Q.What is Planning Horizon? Answer: In this step, you define the planning horizon. This planning horizon specifies the period for the "Net change planning in the planning horizon". In this kind of net change planning, only those materials that have undergone a change that is relevant to MRP within the planning horizon are included in the planning run. Such materials receive a net change planning indicator in the planning file. You make this specification for a plant. You can define an alternative planning horizon for MRP groups Q.What is costing? How it is affected the PP? Answer: Determining the material costs of a product. When you calculate production costs using a quantity structure, the system automatically determines the BOM and all the BOM items that are relevant to costing, in order to calculate manufacturing costs. Q.What is Meaning of Customized Reports? Answer:The report which is not using SAP standard reports. Q.In Project the Customization is comes under Which Phase? Answer:Realization. Q.How you get the Ticket? Answer: After release order,the reservation will provide the ticke to pick production material. Q.What are GAPS? Some Examples? Answer:The GAPS are some issue in blue print that SAP cannot capture or prividing the client bussiness process. Q.What is LSMW? Answer: The LSM Workbench is an SAP System tool that supports you when copying data from non-SAP. systems. Q.After Doing Realization How we will check whether it is working or not? Answer: Doing Final preparation to check using the test case from user. Q.What do we do in Realization Phase? Answer: Provide ARICEF, Configuration Documents, integration test, BPP, UAT, Unit Test and implements some SAP notes. Q.How to Move to the Realization Phase? Answer: You must have some blueprints to go in next phase. Q.In LSMW which is most important Step? Answer: Maintain Object Attributes Maintain Source Structures Maintain Source Fields Maintain Structure Relations Maintain Field Mapping and Conversion Rules Maintain Fixed Values, Translations, User-Defined Routines. contact for more information on SAP PP Online Training

SAP QM Interview Questions

Q.Which Movement Types Refer To Inspection Origin 05? Ans: You need to check the T156S-QSSHK. It shows the inspection lot origin for all movement types. Q.I Have Executed Massive Automatic Usage Decision Via Qa16 And Noticed That No Stock Postings Been Updated. The System Noted The Usage Decision But Didn't Carry Any Goods Movements. Why Were The Stock Postings Not Updated? Is It Possible To Execute In Mass Via Qa16? Ans: You should make sure that the UD codes you use have the automatic postings setup for it. The selected set code needs to be set for background postings and what material status it should post to. Take care of these and it will take care of the problems. Q.I Need To Change The Status Of A Lot Based On Certain Conditions And Looked At Qfpo_post_status_for_lot But This Didn't Return Anything. I Need The Status Of The Lot To Be Insp Rrec So That I Can Forward The Result Copy On To Batch Classification? Ans: In general, forcing a change to the system status is not a very good idea. Instead, you should consider using a user status. If the system status is not RREC then, there will be no results to copy. Q.Is It Possible To Make The Inspection Lot Quantity To (1) All The Time? Can It Be Configured As An Automatic Default In Qa01? If Yes, What Are The Steps Necessary To Make A Sample Size Default Every Time We Create An Inspection Lot? Ans: If you are referring to the Sample Size the answer is yes. If you are referring to the Lot Size, then the answer is no. For the lot quantity, you can use a sampling procedure of type fixed and assign the size to 1. Q.In Our Plant, Gr For A Material Was Made Three Months Back. This Material Is Qm Managed. The Quality Plan For This Material Was Made This Month Only. Hence Our Qm Personnel Are Not Able To Clear This Particular Gr. How Do I Go About It? What Is The Tcode For It And How Do I Proceed? Ans: You can reset the Sample Calculation and Recalculate the change in Start & Inspection end date in QA02. In QA02 you can also change the key date on the second tab so it looks for a plan on that date. If that plan has already been created, you can then change the key date to the current date and it will find the plan. Q.How Do I Transfer The Results From One Origin To Another Origin? Ans: This can be done by creating a program attached to the follow up functions for the UD code. Once the UD is done the results can be transferred from lot to lot Q.I Want The System To Take My User Name As Default For Partner Ao Author While Creating A Notification. I've Created The Partner Determination Profile And Assigned It To The Notification But It Is Not Defaulting The User Name As Partner. What Can I Do To Correct This? Ans: I assume that you have an organization for the partners. I think you need to utilize workflow and do some coding. Utilize the user ids. Use the KU for coordinator since it is for the user, and KO is for the person which requires HR. When a Q3 based notification is created the coordinator would be defaulted. But as I said, it requires organization, workflow and some coding. Q.Where Does The System Store Mic Long Text History? When I Tried Using, 'read_text Function Module', The System Is Fetching Only New Long Text. How Do I Fetch The Old Long Text Of Mic? Ans: The system does not store the long text history, because it is a text. To maintain the long text, create MIC with the appropriate versions and assign MIC in the task list as per the required version. The setting is in customization for the plant level, MIC with history. An alternative recourse is to check out AUT10. You need to set it up, but it allows you track changes to any Long Text. I believe it is available from 4.5 or 4.6. Q.Can Somebody Explain To Me How A New Posting Proposal Can Be Added In Order To Use This In The Catalog Assigned To A Ud Code? There Is A New One But Won't Be Available (vmenge01) Until 2007. I Want To Add An Extra One. Ans: Try the customizing path Quality Management -- > Quality Inspection --> Inspection Lot completion -- > Define inventory postings. Q.The Deletion Flag On Production Order Was Set But Had To Be Revoked To Allow Further Goods Issues. Issues Have Now Taken Place But In Trying To Reset The Deletion Flag, The Following Error Message Occurs. "the Order Has Been Flagged With Delivery Complete". What Are The Settings Necessary For Generating Quality Certificates In Sap? Ans: You're normally not allowed to mark a Production order for deletion as long as the financial value on the order isn't zero and/or you've got materials posted to it. I can't see the point in deleting an order with postings. That way you'd probably mess up both logistics and accounting. Q.I Have A Requirement From A Client For Inspection Of A Material For Different Vendors. Characteristics Change From Vendor To Vendor. Automatically , The Inspection Plan Will Need To Be Selected Based On The Vendor. How Do I Accomplish This? Ans: In the material to plan assignment, scroll to the right and you will see a vendor column. If you put a vendor number in that column, that is the plan that will be selected for the material/plant/vendor. Q.I Know It Should Be Possible To Attach Files, Pictures Etc. When Creating Notifications. However, I Am Working Right Know In An Automotive Release And Cannot Find The Button Anymore. Did We Miss Something? What Can Be Wrong? Ans: Check what type of user you have set up. Sometimes the security guys set up a testing ID as a different type than a regular user. Some ID types don't have the ability to use the Object services functionality. Q.I Have Activated 04 Inspection Type With Post To Inspection Stock For A Material. I Have Left Qm Not Active Unchecked For 101 Mvt Type For Mvt Indicator F (gr For Order) In Omjj. While I Am Doing Gr For The Process Order, The '101' Message Appears. What Is The Problem And How Can I Resolve This? Ans: If the process order was created after you modified the material, then it's an "old" process order, and this may explain the error. If there was an existing stock of this material before you start, then try this first with a newly created material. Afterwards, the error you describe should not happen. Q.In The Inspection Plan I Have A Characteristic With Upper Limit. In Which Table Can I Find This Value? Ans: Look at table PLMK. If it is a reference MIC, also check QPMK. These are for checking the plan. The Inspection Lot keeps them in different values. Q.I Am Using Exit Mm06l001 (function Module- Exit_sapmm06l_001) For Quality Criteria. The Scores Of The Sub Criteria Are Calculated On The Basis Of Quality Notifications And Inspection Lots. But No Score Is Getting Calculated For The Vendor. Where Did I Go Wrong And What Can I Do To Remedy The Error? Ans: Regarding quality notification, do verify the following: Notification completed with External origin. Invoice verification already took place. As for inspection lot, verify that usage decision has been made. In addition, verify customization of all required parameters (as listed in documentation under QM->Quality Control->Vendor Evaluation). Q.When I Try To Upload Data With Lsmw To Create Inspection Plan, The System Shows The Message: "bdc_open_group, Lock Date./. Is Invalid". I Have Bdc Authority, So What's The Problem? Ans: Did you enter a date for field START in structure BI000? The date has to be earlier than today's date. The queue start date specifies the day until which a batch input folder is locked. You cannot process a locked batch input folder until the day after the specified date. Q.I Am Doing Quality After Doing Migo Mvt Type 105. So When The Migo Mvt Type105 Doc Is Saved Then The Inspection Lot Is Generated And The Stock Is In Quality. Can You Tell Me The Transaction Code For The Stock On Which The Usage Decision Is Pending? Ans: You can use the list display transaction code QE51N and in the EXCEPTION criteria you can specify it to be ‘UD Not done’. Otherwise in the same transaction code QE51N in the output columns, you can display the column "Usage decision by" and sort by it so that the blank ones are on the top. Those blank ones are the lots for which UD was not done. Once you find out the lot numbers you can open the lot and see the order number in it. Q.Is There A Way To Create Inspection Lot Programmatically In An Abap Report? Is There Any Business Object, Function Module Or User Exit? We Went To 1 Lot For 1 Shift. We Use Inspection Origin 89 (manual). Therefore We're Searching For A Way To Create The Inspection Lot Via Job (abap Program). How Do I Resolve This? Ans: Automatic creation of Inspection lot in SAP is governed by Inspection lot origin, inspection type, etc. You have to give the details of why you want an inspection lot creation by program or ABAP report. Instead, you can use a report /program to do it. Standard SAP provides this functionality. If it is in--process inspection, you can use inspection points based on shifts. Q.I Was In The Process Of Testing The Scenario Of Skip Lots. I Have Done All The Data Maintenance In The Material Master And The Dynamic Modification Rule. The Quality Level Is Getting Updated To A Skip Stage, But The Stock Is Not Getting Directly Put Into Unrestricted Stock When The Lot Should Be Skipping. Where Am I Going Wrong And How Do I Correct This? Ans: This can be done by setting the Control Inspection lot indicator in the QM view of the material master to each material document. Iit works for DMR at a lot and characteristic level. Q.We Have Two Inspection Lots For Which Ud Has Already Been Done. Later On We Realized That These Lots The Sample Size Was Not Calculated. Now We Want To Reset The "sample Calculation" But Not Able As The Status Of The Lot Is "ud Done". Is There A Way We Can Reverse Ud Or Reset The Status Of An Inspection Lot? Ans: Under normal condition, a UD cannot be reversed. Q.How Do I Populate Additional Entries Directly Into The Tables? Is There Any Direct Way To Populate Fields In The Tables? Ans: It depends on which tables you are talking about because some tables can be directly maintained in PRD. For some you have to transport it maintaining in DEV system. For example, number ranges are not transportable. You have to maintain it directly in every instance. If you are talking about mass maintenance, Standard SAP QM does not have it by now. You can talk to your developer to write a program for you by which you can do a mass maintenance. Otherwise SM30 is good enough to run. Q.I Have Created Some Certificate Profiles That Need To Be Deleted. But They Are All In Released Status. I Know That Certificate Profile Cannot Be Deleted If It Is In "rel" Status. How I Should Deal With This Issue? Ans: It seems to me you could potentially block the profile - from within the profile, edit -> block profile. Once it's blocked, you can proceed with the deletion. Q.I Need Some Guidelines In Maintaining The Settings For Batch Management In Qm. What Are The Customizations Necessary For Batch Management From Qm Point Of View? How The Inspection Lots Get Triggered And How Are They Connected / Interlinked To The Batches? Ans: The links have to do with your configuration of batch management for your material. If the materials in question are batch managed and are purchased or manufactured within your organization when the material is received using the 101 movement type, the batch is created and assigned in the background to the inspection lot. Depending on how you've designed your inspection plan or material specification, you can build the master inspection characteristics, dependent on class characteristics, that will copy the inspection results into the batch record. This is less QM configuration than it is MM-Batch Management configuration and material master definition. Q.I Want To Post The Stock From Quality Inspection To Unrestricted Use Partially With Two Ud Codes For Same Inspection Lot. But The Qga2 System Will Show The Total Document Posted On Only One Usage Decision Code. I Want To Evaluate The Stock On The Basis Of Usage Decision Code. How Can I Resolve This Issue? Ans: You could use inspection points and partial lots. In this way, you may have a different UD for inspection points and inventory posting accordingly. Q.I Would Like To Know Where The Batch Status Can Be Set In Sap. We Have The Stock Type Q For Quality Inspection. We Would Like Stock Type R For Rework And S For Blocked. Where Can This Be Set In Sap? Ans: There is no way to create a new status. The only thing you can do, if you have Batch Management, is to activate the Batch status so you can have Unrestricted (blank), Quality (Q) and Blocked (S). Having these batch statuses, you can duplicate all stocks to restricted Q, blank and S. Q.I Am Having 3 Different Operations. The 0020 And 0030 Operation Is Dependent On The 0010 Operation. It Means That Once The Rr Is Done For Operation 0010, Manual Ud Has To Be Taken Immediately. Then Results Are Recorded For Operation 0020 & 0030 And Finally A Common Ud Is Made For Both 0020 & 0030 Operation. This Is The Case For Incoming Inspection And In Process Inspection. Is There Any Customization For This Type Of Rr & Ud? Ans: You could use Inspection Points for 0010 (it has its own UD) and then use the Inspection Lot UD for the whole process. Q.How Do I Use Material Specification? If I Want To Use Material Specification, What Are The Things I Should Do? Ans: To use Material specification you need to have: Class Characteristics; MIC's linked to the Class Characteristics; A Class containing the Class Characteristics, assigned to the Material Master; Material spec maintained. (QS61); Limit values for the characteristics, maintained in the classification view in the material master; Inspection with material specification chosen in the inspection type in the material master. Q.While Rr For Some Of The Mic's, The System Is Asking For Manual Valuation And For Some It Is Not Asking. I Want The System To Ask Manual Valuation For All The Mic's. What Settings Should I Do To Get This? Ans: Check your Valuation Mode / Sampling Procedure. From there, you can find the settings needed to configure your requirement. Q.Is It Possible To Cancel The Inspection Lot Once It Has Been Created? Ans: You can cancel it by reversing the transaction that created it. It's also possible to go into the inspection lot in Chance mode and set the status to “locked”. It will then disappear, but if there's QI stock linked to it you won't get it out. Contact for more on SAP QM Online Training

SAP SD Interview Questions

Q.What Stands for SPRO? Answer: SPRO stands for SAP Project Reference Object SPRO is used to configure the SAP System as per client’s requirement. IMG (Implementation Management Guide) menu which you will find customization settings for all SAP modules, will be shown after executing SPRO transaction. Q.What is Functional Specs? Answer: Functional specification is a comprehensive document which describes the desired functionality. It contains technical information and data. It describes the scope, current functionality and desired functionality of a function/transaction Q.What is me Variant Configuration? What are the type of questions we can expect in that ? Answer: Variant configuration is used where you have a configurable material like computer (made up of components like processor, monitor, keyboard, mouse etc). These components are called as characteristics in variant config. Again this will be having values like processor can be either P4 or P3, monitor can be 15" or 17" etc. Based on the values selected the variant pricing will happen using the condition type VA00. Q.SAP SD Customer Groups Sales Distribution Module OVS9? Answer: SAP's Sales and Distribution module is quite comprehensive and contains various features for analysis. One such feature within SAP SD is the creation of Customer Groups. Simply speaking, customer groups are part of the customer master data in SAP IMG. Customers are assigned to a particular customer group by assigning a two digit alphanumeric key. Such customer group key needs to be assigned to each and every customer master records. The main benefit of customer groups is that it can be used in generating statistics and creating condition records such as records for pricing. One example which I can give is suppose you create two sets of customer groups, say Customer group A1 for domestic sales and Customer group A2 for international sales. You can choose to give discount to customer group A1 which are customers in the domestic market by creating a pricing condition for group A1. Customer groups can be created in SAP SD user the following menu path: IMG >> Sales & Distribution >> Master Data >> Business Partners >> Customers >> Sales >> Define Customer Groups Alternatively, one can use the transaction code OVS9. One needs to simply define a two digit alphanumeric customer group key. Once defined, the same can be assigned to a customer master record using the transaction code VD02. Such custoomer master key can be made mandatory for all customer master records. Q.Tel about the Order to Cash Cycle ? Answer: A customer orders some items from your company by creating a sales order (Tcodes: VA01, VA02, VA03, Tables: VBAK, VBAP etc). Your company decides to deliver the items ordered by the customer. This is recorded by creating a outbound delivery document (TCodes:VL01N, VL02N, VL03N, Tables: LIKP, LIPS etc). Once the items are available for sending to the customer, you post goods issue which reduces your inventory and puts the delivery in transit. This will create a material document. You will post goods issue using VL02N but the material document created will be stored in tables MKPF, MSEG. You will then create shipment document to actually ship the items. (Tcodes: VT01N, VT02N, VT03N, Tables: VTTK, VTTP etc). You finally create a sales billing document. (TCodes: VF01, VF02, VF03, Tables: VBRK, VBRP etc). This will have a corresponding accounting document created that will be in BKPF, BSEG tables. When customer pays to your invoice, it will directly hit your Account Receivables account in FI. You will have to remember that these are not a required sequence. Some times, you may configure your system to create a SD invoice as soon as you create a sales order or you may not create a shipping document at all. This is the position where Functional Consultant would come into picture and study the company's order to cash process and configure the SAP system to do so. Q.Explain how we will configure milestone billing , periodic billing and which scenario we will use? Answer: Menu path: IMG->sales & distribution->Billing->billing plans->define billing plan types. You set the start date and end dates if applicable to the type of billing you are using. What time to be billed (end of month, start of month etc..) Milestone is a billing plan type where a customer is billed for the amount distributed between the dates until total value is reached eg: if the total billing amount is 1000 USD for a year. You will bill the customer in different amounts say 200, 500, 300 at different intervals as per customer agreement. On the other hand Periodic billing is billing the customer for the total amount(here 1000 USD) at regular intervals periodically until the customer agreement is reached. eg: 1000/12 for a 1 year agreement and say billed at the 1st day of every month Explanation for Billing Plan for Milestone Billing Milestone billing means distributing the total amount to be billed over multiple billing dates in the billing plan. As each milestone is successfully reached, the customer is billed either a percentage of the entire project cost or simply a pre-defined amount. During sales order processing, the system determines from the item category whether a billing plan is required and, if so, which type of plan ,The type of billing plan that is determined at this point is set up in Customizing and cannot be changed in the sales document. Billing plans for periodic billing and milestone billing plans for project-related milestone billing have different overview screens so that you can enter data relevant to your processing. .Q. why to Search for a transaction code ? Answer: If you're not sure what a transaction code is, or you know the transaction code but can't find it in the menu, use this transaction: Type in the transaction code, or part of the name e.g. sales order. Any transaction name with that text in it will be shown, along with the menu path Q.How many clients we will create in land scape (like in development server, quality server, production server ) if we are creating more than one in each server what is exact use of that client ? Answer: Client landscape : Basic layout : dev -testing- production also - Sandbox server . for trial and error - Development server for actually creating transports(CTS) - Global server. If you have global implementations at different client locations (eg; canada, US, UK) (for testing purposes with actual master data as well) - Testing server.(for regression testing purposes before moving to prodcution, integration etc..) - Production server is the actual production system The clients could be variable and could be created to a specific server . usually a developed. where abap, functional would mess around. say : client 100-functinal consultants ,client 300- abapers ,client 400- other users(like super etc) Q.What is the Definition of Transaction? Answer: A transaction in SAP is like a program in normal computer languages, and is identified by a four-character transaction code. A transaction can be initiated directly from the command field on the presentation interface or from the corresponding menu option. There are two kinds of transactions: report and dialog transactions. Report transactions are SAP programs that collect selection parameters from the selection screen followed by the output called the lists. Dialog programs consist of more than one interactive screen called a dynpro. These transactions sometimes also need pre selected information for triggering them, not unlike the explicit selection screens in report programs; these are called parameter transactions. Q.What are the responsibilities of "CORE TEAM" and "FUNCTIONAL TEAM" in an implementation? Answer: Core Team are the power users who are selected for the SAP implementation. The Functional Team gather the initial implementation requirement from these core team users who will be the bridge between the SAP Functional Team and their department users with the expert work knowledge. Q.whether it is possible to have a Customized of Transaction code or self defined transaction code in SAP? Answer: One of the most asked question in a SAP interview is whether it is possible to have a self defined transaction code in SAP. The answer to the question is simple and if given tactfully can impress the interviewers. To start with, yes, self-defined reports, transactions or functions are possible within SAP. There might be numerous reasons why a company might go in for customized transaction codes or for that matter reports. To cater to this demand, SAP allows creation of user-defined transaction codes. Creating a transaction code allows the user to speed up access to specific reports/programs as the user no longer needs to use transaction code . Thus, instead of using T-Code SA38, then entering the program name or report name and pressing execute, the same can be done directly through a pre-defined T-Code. The user can then simply use a transaction code, which will automatically open the program. In SAP customized T-codes can be created through transaction code . Q.How to Find the Frequently used SAP Transaction code? Answer: If you are the kind of person who stores his frequently used SAP transactions in his memory instead of his favorites folder, you might from time to time run out of memory and experience some difficulties to remember a specific transaction code. On the other hand, if you work with the SAP menu and spare a bit your memory, you might also have some problems from time to time to find your way back in the SAP menu to a specific transaction. Here are 2 tips to find back your transactions. The first one is more targeted towards specialists as you might need advanced authorizations to run it while the second one is more generic and standard. Using table TSTCT Executing transaction SE16 on table TSTCT and selecting as language field (SPRSL) ‘EN’ for English, you may try and find transaction codes based on their texts. Note that you may use ‘*’ generic characters in the text search and that the search IS case-sensitive. Using transaction SEARCH_SAP_MENU As its name indicates, transactions SEARCH_SAP_MENU searches the SAP menu for a transaction code or text you specify and outputs the directory path to the transactions. Note that not only transactions are matched against the search text but also transactions directories themselves (they are easily recognized because they have no associated transaction code in the resulting list). Another big advantage of this method is that the search IS NOT case-sensitive Q.what is the method of time saving Transactions ? Answer: System transaction codes can be entered in the command field to go directly to a transaction or a function. The following conventions are important time-saving tips for using transaction codes /n – cancels the current transaction /nxxxx – initiates the specified transaction directly from an another transaction /o – displays an overview of sessions /oxxxx – initiates the specified transaction in a new session /nend – ends the logon session with a confirmation pop-up window /nex – ends the logon session without a confirmation pop-up window /i – deletes the current session Q.What are posting Keys and How are they used while making postings? Answer: Posting Keys are defined at Client Level. Posting keys determine whether a line item is a debit or credit as well as the possible field status for the transaction. In this context, it is essential to understand the factors that determine the field status of a transaction. The field status within a FI document is controlled by Accout Type, field status of Posting Key and the field status of the G/L account. Modifying the SAP delivered Posting keys are not recommended. if a posting key is to be modified the best possible action is to copy the posting key that needs to be modified and then modify the copy. we can define the posting keys using the transaction OB41. It also determines the account type to which the debit or credit is to be made and whether it is Spl G/L transaction. If it is a Spl G/L transaction, then the field for Spl G/L indicator becomes required entry. Q.what is the method of Automatic Account Assignment in SD ? Answer: During goods issue in the sales cycle, the system is usually configured to update the relevant GL accounts automatically and to create the relevant accounting documents. This customization in IMG is also called material account assignment and is achieved through a number of steps as detailed below: Determine ‘valuation level’ (Company Code or plant). Activate ‘valuation grouping code’ and link it with the ‘chart of accounts’ for each ‘valuation area.’ Link ‘valuation class’ with ‘material type’ (FERT, HAWA, HALB, etc.) with the ‘account category reference’ (combination of valuation classes). Maintain ‘account modification codes’ for ‘movement types.’ Link ‘account modification codes’ with ‘process keys’ (transaction/event keys). Maintain a GL account for a given combination of ‘chart of accounts’+ ‘valuation grouping code ‘+’ account modification code ‘+’ valuation classes.’ The process of Automatic Account Determination is as follows: Depending on the ‘plant’ entered during goods issue (GI), the ‘Company Code’ is determined by the system which in turn determines the relevant ‘Chart of Accounts.’ The plant thus entered in goods issue determines the ‘valuation class’ and then the ‘valuation grouping code.’ The ‘valuation class’ is determined from the ‘material master.’ Since the ‘account modification code’ is assigned to a ‘process key’ which is already linked to a ‘movement type,’ the ‘transaction key’ (DIF, GBB, AUM, BSX, etc.) determines the ‘GL account’ as posting transactions are predefined for each ‘movement type’ in ‘inventory management Q.What are the Movement types in MM ? Answer: In SAP Materials Management, goods movement is distinguished using a three digit key which is called the “movement type”. The movement type is important because it controls the screen layout, adjustment of inventories, the GL account for financial purposes etc. Goods movement have been discussed elaborately here. The various types of material movement types in SAP materials management MM are given below: Movement Type and Goods Movement 101 Goods receiving for ordering 104 Goods receiving blocking status for ordering 122 Return delivery to suppliers 201 Goods outflow (WA) to cost centers 221 Goods outflow to project 231 Goods outflow to customer order 241 Goods outflow to factory 251 Goods outflow to sales 261 Goods outflow to order 291 Goods outflow for all account allocations 321 Release from quality checking 551 Goods outflow for scrap 321 Release from quality checking 451 Returns from customers 453 Inventory to inventory transfers 501 Goods receiving without order 511 No cost delivery 521 Internal goods receiving without manufacturing order 561 Inventory taking Q.what are Types of Stock ? Answer: Used in the determination of available stock of a material, the Stock Type is the sub-division of inventory at a storage location based on the use of that inventory. In SAP, there are many kinds of stock types: Valuated Stocks are the stocks which belongs to your company. There are three types of valuated stocks Unrestricted Stock is the physical stock that is always available at a plant/storage location Quality Inspection Stock is not counted for unrestricted use and may be made available for MRP. To give an example, you want to do inspection on arrival, you shift your stock to Quality inspection stock then you do the quality inspection Blocked stock is not counted as unrestricted stock and is not available for MRP. Non Valuated stock is the stock which you will keep in your premised and this is not valuated in your company The GR-blocked stock denotes all the stock accepted ‘conditionally’ from the vendors. This stock is not considered available for ‘unrestricted use.’ You will use the Movement Type 103 for the GR-blocked stock and Movement Type 101 is used for a normal GR. Special stock is the stock managed separately that does not belong to company or that are stored at particular location Q.Explain & How is Stock Transfer between Plants happens? Answer: 1- Step Transfer This process describes to transfer the material stock between plants 1-step. This type of stock transfer can only be carried out in Inventory Management. Neither Shipping in the issuing plant nor purchasing in the receiving plant is involved in the process. Transferring stock in one step has the following characteristics: – The stock transfer is entered as a transfer posting in Inventory Management. Creating a reservation can plan the transfer posting. The quantity of the stock transferred is posted immediately from the unrestricted-use stock of the issuing plant to the unrestricted-use stock of the receiving plant The transfer posting is valuated at the valuation price of the material in the issuing plant. If the plants involved belong to different company codes, the transfer between plants is also a transfer between company codes. In this case, the system creates two accounting documents for the transfer posting. The stock posting is offset against a company code clearing account. 2- Step Transfer This process describes to transfer the material stock between plants in 2-step. This type of stock transfer can only be carried out in Inventory Management. If you post a stock transfer from plant to plant using the two-step procedure, you post the removal from storage at the issuing plant first. After you post the removal from storage, the quantity being transferred is managed in stock in transfer at the receiving plant. It is not yet part of unrestricted-use stock, however. You post the placement into storage at the receiving plant in a second step. Only then are the event completed and the transferred quantity part of unrestricted-use stock. Possible reasons for carrying out the a stock transfer in two steps may be: The plants are located at quite a distance from each other and the goods are in transit for a prolonged period of time; or there is one employee responsible at each plant, and each can only post movements for his/her own plant. Q.Explain what is Physical Inventory? Answer: Main Business Scenario: Your enterprise has to carry out a physical inventory of its warehouse stocks at least once per fiscal year to balance its inventory. Various procedures can be implemented for this. In a periodic inventory, all the enterprise’s stocks are physically counted on the balance sheet key date. Every material has to be counted. During counting, the entire warehouse must be blocked for material movements. In the continuous inventory procedure, stocks are counted continuously throughout the entire fiscal year. In this case, it is important to ensure that every material is physically counted at least once during the fiscal year. You can also implement special procedures, such as cycle counting (physical inventory at regular intervals) and inventory sampling (physical inventory of randomly selected stocks). Physical Inventory types: Periodic; Sampling; Continuous; Cycle Counting With both continuous and periodic inventory types, the following stock types can be included in the physical inventory: -Unrestricted use stocks in warehouse -Quality inspection stocks -Blocked stock The cycle counting inventory method creates a physical inventory document only for stock type 1 (unrestricted use). The inventory sampling procedure is only applicable to stock types 1 (unrestricted use) and 2 (quality inspection stocks). The Physical Inventory Process: Create physical inventory document->Set blocking indicator->Print physical inventory document->Enter count results->List of differences->Post differences Physical Inventory Number: The physical inventory number was created as an additional hierarchy above the physical inventory document number. You can use it to group together different physical inventory documents that belong together organizationally. You assign physical inventory numbers when you create and change physical inventory documents, and you can use them as an extra selection criterion for physical inventory reports. This enables you to directly display the physical inventory documents per storage location, customer, or vendor. If you have not finished entering the complete physical inventory count, you can freeze the book inventory balance in the physical inventory document to prevent goods movements from changing the book inventory balance relevant to the physical inventory count, which would result in incorrect inventory differences. You define in Customizing for Inventory Management whether you can freeze book inventory balances in the storage location. When entering a physical inventory count with reference to a physical inventory document that contains many items with a quantity of zero, you can set zero count automatically for all items that have not yet been counted. In Customizing for Inventory Management, you can define the following value tolerances for posting inventory differences for a user group: maximum amount per physical inventory document maximum amount per document item Relevant tables: IKPF: Header: Physical Inventory Document ISEG: Physical Inventory Document Items Q.What is the function of counter in pricing procedure ? Please explain with an example ? Answer: Counter is used to show a second mini-step within an actual step. For example, you may have all your freight charges assigned to step 100, however there may be three condition types, each representing a different freight charge. Thus you can assign a freight condition type to step 100 counter 1, another to step 100 counter 2; another to step 100 counter 3; and so on Q.What is the use of VPRS, EK01 and Ek02? For material cost we are using VPRS why we need EK01 and EK02 ? Answer: VPRS is the internal price condition which is copies from material master and can not be manual procss.It is mainly used to calculate revenue sv from particular material. EK01 is for actual costing EK02 is for calculates costing for costing purpose. Q.What is the purpose of the request number which is generated when u save a customization? Answer: Request # will be of format SysIdKxxxxxx, where sys id is your DEV(development), QAS (Quality) or PRO (Production) clients, letter K followed by a 6 digit number. Each rask in IMG is attached with a Req #. When we need to transport the requests from 1 client to another Eg: DEV to QAS, we 1st need to release lower level requests followed by higher level requests using SE09 / SE10. Only then we will sbe able to transport them which Basis guy does Q.What is the advantage of using the text as a reference instead of duplicating it? Answer: In general: Referencing avoids data entry errors and allows a standard message relayed. And To reduce load on the system referencing is considered better than copying. Q.where is Integration happened between the SD and FI-CO ? Answer: A key feature of an enterprise data system such as SAP is integration of function where events occuring in the system cause accounting entries to be made automatically when the events happen. This means that there is no lag between events and the books. To facilitate this process SAP uses this basic method: The account key determines the type of price and discount calculation made The type of sales revenue posting to feed data into profitability analysis The customer master record is the source for data The material master record is the source for data on what was shipped from inventory Q.What are the condition conversion and customer/material conversion in the Organization structure, how do you navigate? Please answer with example? Answer: In the Organization Structure if you have more than one distribution channel and division then you have to go for common Dist. Channel t/c VOR1 and similar for division VOR2 or SPRO>Sale and Distribution>Master A) DCDC and DCD Q.In consignment fill up we delivery goods to customer site, is there any agreement with customer? if yes what type of agreement(relating price)?if no with out agreement how can we place rupees lacks of amount to customer site? Answer: Yes, there is always an agreement that the customer will sell or consume the materials. Billing is done only when the customer actually sells or consumes the materials. The unsold goods or unused materials are our materials and the customer can return them (if he wants). Materials may be kept at either customer's site or our site. Ownership of material passes only in case of : 1) Consignment Issue : from us to customer i.e. when the customer actually sells or consumes the material. 2) Consignment Return : from customer back to us. It does not pass in case of : Fill-up or Pick-up. Q.When will you combine deliveries into one invoice? Answer: 1 we will combine multiple deliveries into one invoice, when the bill to party , payment terms and billing date is same. And also when billing date, that means billing is done only once in a month for that particular customer, then you combine all deliveries of that month create invoice 2 In one scenario it depends up on the customer master data in the following way if that specific customers have multiple ship to parties as mentioned in partner functions of the master data of the customer and for all these ship to parties there will be unique bill to party or payer this takes place. If the confirm delivery date of materials to different ship to parties must be unique. 3)In another scenario it depends up on the availability check in the following as it depends up the checking group if the system finds collective requirement in the checking group of this material master record of the specified material it combines all the deliveries and transfers to the billing document as one invoice. Q.How to stop PGI? Answer: We Can't stop PGI (Post Goods Issue ), if u want to reversal u can use VL09 and then cancelled delivery to use transaction VLO2N. Q.Tell me a few tickets handled by you during your support? Answer: Material Discount was not included in Pricing Procedure. Tax was not configured in Pricing. Material was required to be substituted by some other material during unavailability. It was required to assign new Partner to Customer. It was required to make some fields in Material Master as required entry A2. first of of all tickets are the requirement which comes from client side or by the end users .the ticket which i faced was client wants to give discount if customers pay within given period of time say 20days he will get 10% discount and 5% 10days before 20days and 2% 5 days before 10days.My problem is that i am unable to insert 2%discount in terms of payment how to solve it. 2nd Ticket was client wants transportation zone in pricing which not maintained in field catalog, 3rd Ticket was client wants vprs should be his selling price i.e pr00 should not be maintained. Q.User-specific parameters means? How to create that one? Answer: These parameters are specific to the logon user id. you can access this by going to pull down main menu--System- User Profile--> Own data--> in that the 3rd Tab page. A 2> These are module specific parameters which serve different purposes. Ex-EFB parameter for MM Purchase order-Prices display Q.Explain to me in detail Alternate condition base value, and alternate calculation type? Answer: ALTERNATE CALCULATION TYPE : This function allows you use a formula as an alternative in finding the value of the condition type, instead of standard condition technique. this can be used to calculate complex tax structures. ALTERNATE CONDITION BASE VALUE : The alternative condition base value is a formula assigned to a condition type in order to promote an alternative base value for the calculation of a value. Q.what r all the documents will generate after saving invoice? Answer: After saving invoice 5 documents are generated: Revenue Account Customer Receivables Account profit center Account. Special Purchase Ledger Account Profit Analysis Account. Q.What is Business Process Reengineering ? Explain it ? Answer: BPR means the existing business process how you re-engineered to get client requirements. (Line items clearing at the time of customer receipts which is not exists in the legacy) Q.What are the two user exits you have used in your project? Answer: Examples of user exits : MV50AFZZ i used it to carry out availability check for batch managed materials Q.In sales order how system does picks up plant? Answer: first system looks in the following way : 1) Customer material Info Record 2) Customer master record 3) Material Master Record Q.How is shipping point determined? Answer: shipping point will be determined based on the shipping conditions, loading group and delivery plant. Q.Where do you assign Movement Type? Answer: we assign movement type in schedule line category. As is is related to transfer. Q.What is out put of Blue print ? Answer: Blue print means collecting the business requirements and mapping these with in sap R/3 if propose is not met then some other solution how to map in SAP R/3 i.e AS IS – TO BE study so the out put will be under standing the requirements and providing the solution in sap with flow charts and get the acceptance from the business team before configure the system i.e realization stage Q.Who are called Super users when it comes to training in SAP ? Answer: There are Consultants, Power users, End users in a SAP R/3 system. The users are differentiated by the level of authorization End users-- Normaly are given authorisation to only specific transactions ( T.codes)-- like creation of Sale order, Delivery, transfer order etc etc.. For eg a person in the ware house would only be given authorization to create, Transfer orders and not to create Sale orders. Similarly a sales person will have the authorization to create SOs and not TOs. Power Users-- People who have additional authorizations to change or add data to make the system adapt to day to day business requirements are power users. Master record creation, Condition record creation. These people sometimes are also allowed to view the customization screens and normally not allowed to make any changes in the customization. Consultants-- These people (We) mainly work in customization. their authorization level depends on the Server they work on. For eg: In development server to all screens In testing server except few critical customization screen to all screens In production server – To get any screen in production to end user, here user role can be changed by the help of basis to work in production server in case of emergency like they would like to find the root cause of the error which happens only in production server and not in any other server. Q.How to handle returnable packing material? what is the process involved in it?: Answer: Returnable packaging consists of materials that are stored at the customer location but which remain the property of your company. The customer is only required to pay you for the returnable packaging if he does not return it to you by a specified time. Ex: Coke Bottles, retailers have to return them to the factory. Item Category Group LEIH. and Treated as Special Stock. Pick up and issue will be available like consignment. Q.In order to make up a Sales Area which Organizational Elements will help? Answer: In Order to make Sales Area following Organizational elements Are required. 1 Sales Organization. 2 Distribution Channel. 3 Division. Q.What is the difference between condition type EK01 and EK02? Answer: EK01 IS A CALCLATED COST EK02 IS A ESTIMATED COST Q.If we don’t give the horizon period in dynamic credit check what will happen? Answer: 1. IT WILL work as STATIC OR SIMPLE CREDIT CHECK AS YOU ARE NOT MAINTAINING THE CREDIT HORIZON FOR CHECKING PURPOSE SYSTEM WILL CONSIDER TODAY'S DATE AS DEFAULT. Q.Customer hierarchies use? Answer: customer hierarchies are use to show the tree structure of the customer in the company. it is used to give the discount based on the hierarchy. for rebate processing the customer hierarchies are used to give the exact discount. Q.What do you mean by POD(proof of delivery) what is the use of pod? What are the con figuration you done in your project? Answer: Proof of delivery is the confirmation, sent by the customer upon goods receipt. Company will raise the billing document based on that confirmation. They normally use an intermediate document with application link enabling. On the whole, It is done by an abapers. Q.What is BADI’s and Explain it ? Answer: Badis stands for Business Add Ings. and it is for enhancements in the application area. main use of it is Reusability, BADI’s are oops based. BADI’s can be used any number of times in a project. Q.Can we have different pricing procedure for sales order and invoice? Answer: 1. yes , you can do it by assigning different doc pricing procedure for sales doc. eg. you can assign different Doc pricing procedure for OR, F2, accordingly different pricing procedure will be determined for both document. ( you will have to assign this DocPP in pricing procedure determination) 2. Yes it is possible to have a PricProc in Billing different from that of SO. Since the PricProc determination takes place at invoice level also. Generally, the Sales area & CPP (Cust pricing Proc) indicator won't change, however the DPP (Document Pricing Procedure) can be different for the billing type than that of sales order type. enhance a different Pricing proc can be determined. However, in practice, people may not be doing this. Q.Different between inquiry and quotation? Answer: 1, Inquiry is just a simple document showing some interest shown by the prospective customer on products and services offered by the company. Date and Price nothing is relevant here. BUT quotation is a legal agreement which is given/offered to the Customer. The company will agree to the customer, that company will charge a particular amount to a particular quantity of a particular product and this agreement is time limited and not valid after that time duration. 2.Quotation is legally binding offer from sales organization to a customer for providing goods and services under certain fixed conditions Quotation id valid for limited period only Q.What is the use of column CONDITION TYPE in Pricing procedure determination. Like sales area + customer. pp+ Doc. pp+ Pricing procedure+ CONDITION TYPE, without maintain condition type system get pricing procedure in sales order then what is the use of this column ? Answer: To be more clear, the condition type entered along with the pricing procedure determination would become a column in the line item of the sale order. so instead of going into the item data conditions screen and entering the value , you can straight away enter it in the line item Q.What is transfer order? Answer: An instruction to move materials from a source storage bin to a destination storage bin in a warehouse complex at a specified time. A transfer order consists of items that contain the quantity of the material to move and specifies the source and destination storage bins. A transfer order can be created based on a customer delivery, a transfer requirement, or a posting change notice. Source and destination storage bins can be in different warehouses. Application: This is the term of Warehouse Management (LE-WM) and linked into SD Module, where clients business run through Warehouse Related Transaction: VL01N LT03 LT09 VL02N Q.What are the fields in pricing procedure? Answer: There are 16 columns in pricing procedure 1. Step 2. Counter 3. Condition type 4. Description 5. From 6. To 7. Manual 8. Mandatory 9. Statistical 10.Print 11.Subtotal 12.Print 13.Alternative calculation type 14.Altenate condition base value 15.Account key 16.Accruals Q.What are the Standard output types in SD? Answer: Standard Output Types in SD are as under: 1. Sales Order Confirmation: BA00 2. Outbound Delivery Note: LD00 3. Billing Document: RD00 5. Cash Sales: RD03 6. Inquiry: AF00 7. Quotation: AN00 8. Contract: KO00 9. Picking List: EK00 Q.What is Condition type? Answer: A condition type is one which describes that what is the purpose of that condition i.e. it represents a real time pricing like price, discount, freight or taxes condition types are used to define how the particular condition is going to perform. Condition types are linked to access sequence which in turn is linked to condition tables. Condition types are used wherever we use condition technique. Hence it is used in pricing, material determination, output control, etc.Some important condition types in pricing are pr00-pricing, kfoo-freight, k007-customer discount... Q.What is difference between delivery document & scheduling? Answer: Delivery doc is the actual delivery that we create in VL01N for the sales order. Delivery scheduling is the process by which system proposes the confirmed delivery date when a sales order is loaded. For eg consider that the customer has placed an order on 8th Sep & requested delivery RDD on 12th. Consider that you have maintained 2 days as transit time, 1 day as loading time & 1 day as pick pack time. Then the system initially carries backward scheduling from the RDD. So from 12th, it will calculate backwards. So your goods should leave your shipping point by 10th, loading should start by 9th, pick pack should start on 8th. System will see is material is available on 8th. If yes, then it will confirm the requested delivery date RDD. If not, system will check for the material availability date MAD. If MAD is on 10th, then system will do forward scheduling from 10th. So items can be picked by 11th, loading done on 12th & goods will reach customer on 14th (2 days transit). So confirmed delivery date is 14th. System will propose this date as delivery date in shipping view of sales order main screen. This process is called delivery scheduling. Q.What is Extract used in condition tech. in pricing? Answer: condition tech is the main backbone of pricing without condition there is no pricing Condition tables + access sequence + condition type + Pricing procedure = Condition technique Q.What is the difference between plant and storage location? Answer: - plant is place where Production/assembling of material is done as per PP-module, place where Storage/purchasing of material done as per MM-module and for sales plant is place where sales and service is provided. - Storage Location is a place allotted inside a plant for the purpose to maintain the stock. The same considered for all modules (PP, SD, & MM) Q.What is the purpose of sales document type? Answer: Sales documents is nothing but data container, and its a proof of transactions to simplify business process document categorized into 3 types :sales document, delivery document , billing document sales document :sales related data is going to be captured here to map different process transactions sap has categorized into 4 types. Presales order: inquiry, quotation (IN, QT) Standard order: OR, cash rush Customer outline agreement: Scheduling agreement-DS & contracts Customer complaints: credit, debit (G2, L2) The functions of sales document type are: It can determine whether the sales doc of that type is blocked or not, No. ranges for the documents, whether a reference doc is mandatory or not, whether it should read cus.material info record, whether the system should run credit checks and how it should respond etc.. A sales document type fulfills a requirement of a specific business transaction.. for example in a cash sale you would require the delivery to be happening immediately after the order and you would require a invoice slip to be handed over to the customer immediately after his purchase. These things are customized in your Cash sales(CS) document type.. SAP SD Interview Questions SAP SD Interview Questions and Answers Q.What is an integration point between SD AND MM? Answer: Link Between SAP SD, MM & FI The link between SD and MM :- 1. When you create sales order in SD, all the details of the items are copied from Material master of MM. 2. MRP and availability check related data is also taken from MM although you control this data in SD also. 3. While you create inbound/outbound delivery with reference to a sales order, the shipping point determination takes place with the help of the loading group, plant data, shipping conditions etc. This also refers to Material Master. 4. The material which you are entering in a sales order must be extended to the sales area of your sales order/customer otherwise you cannot transact with this material. There are many such links between SD and MM. Now the link between SD and FI :- 1. Whenever you create a delivery with reference to a sales order, goods movement takes place in the background. eg.In case of standard sales order, you create an outbound goods delivery to the customer. Here movement 601 takes place. This movement is configured in MM. Also, this movement hits some G/L account in FI. Every such movement of goods hits some G/L account. 2. The accounts posting in FI is done with reference to the billing documents (invoice, debit note, credit note etc) created in SD. Thus this is a link between SD and FI 3. Tax determination: In case of a tax determination also, there is a direct link between SD and MM . SD Integration points with other modules SD module is highly integrated with the other modules in SAP. Sales Order Integration Points Module Availability Check - MM Credit Check - FI Costing - CO/ MM Tax Determination - FI Transfer of Requirements - PP/ MM Delivery & Goods Issue Integration Points Module Availability Check - MM Credit Check - FI Reduces stock - MM Reduces Inventory $ - FI/ CO Requirement Eliminated - PP/ MM Billing - Integration Points Module Debit A/R - FI/ CO Credit Revenue - FI/ CO Updates G/L - FI/ CO (Tax, discounts, surcharges, etc.) Milestone Billing – PS Return Delivery & Credit Memo - Integration Points Module Increases Inventory - MM Updates G/ L - FI Credit Memo - FI Adjustment to A/R - FI Reduces Revenue - FI Q.What are MRP types? Answer: Material Requirement Planning is concept of planning for the demand, whether we need the material - to be planned internally - to be procured externally - to be planned in external system (ex APO - No planning - time based planning Q.What is use of customer group? Answer: Customer group is used for generating statistics and also used to give group pricing, and discounts etc... Q.What is the difference between incomplete order and backorder processing? Answer: Incomplete orders are the orders which have not maintained Completely as to full fill the business requirement to place the order ( as defined in incompletion proc by business). The backorder is the order in which has not confirmed in Full or not confirmed at a requested delivery date. (Certain delivery date) Q.Why does the customer master have different views? Answer: The main purpose of the customer views is for each dept to determine the roles effectively in customer GENERAL DATA- deals with all the details regarding the customer COMPANY CODE DATA- deals with financial aspects. SALES AREA DATA- deals with sales; billing; shipping details along with the partner determination Q.What is t-code for listing the blocked documents? Answer: VKM1 is for blocked document, VKM2 Released Doc. Q.What is batch split? Answer: If a material is managed in batches then you can carry out a batch split for every component. This means that if you Split a batch, you assign more than one batch to one Component. In this case, each batch is displayed as a Separate component in the component overview. Batch splits can only be triggered manually in the Production order. The following requirements must be met for batch splitting: (1)The material master record of the material must specify That the material is managed in batches. (2)Batches must exist for the material. Q.What is difference between SD account key and FI account key? Answer: Account key is created and provided by FI. Account key determines the G/L account to which the amount is to be posted. SD defines account key in pricing and FI uses it for posting taxes. To the maximum both are one and same to find the right G/L account through condition technique .SD Account key will be from Pricing procedure and the FI Account key is from the tax procedure. as far as my knowledge is concerned both the Key purpose is same. Acct keys are defined in FI only, SD people only use them, say in pricing. But ultimately they r used for posting the amounts to relevant GL accounts only Q.How is credit control determined? Answer: Credit control is determined in the combination COMPANY CODE + CUSTOMER RISK CATEGORY + CREDIT GROUP = CREDIT CONTROL AREA One Company code can be assigned too many credit control areas And multiple company codes are not assigned to one credit Control area. Q.What are the parameters in FD32? Answer: FD32 Maintains credit management records here we can give the amount of the customer WHAT IS HIS credit limit. U can see address of the customer, Central data, status and payment history of the customer. Q.What is the difference between routine and requirements? Answer: Requirements are used in different area of SD, for example requirement in pricing procedure, it restrict the access of the condition type. for example the rebate condition type bo01 has the requirement 24 it means that this condition type should appear in the billing document. Routine means the program written for the requirement.ie the logic written in the ABAP code. Q.What is condition supplement and why is it used? Answer: A condition supplement is a group of conditions that should be applied every time a certain condition is found. for Eg: If u define a material price, u will enter condition records for that material and the corresponding price. If u also want to give discount to that material every time the price is determined, u can enter the discount condition type as a condition supplement. So whenever the price is determined for the material, it will automatically includes the discount condition records. Q.What is the difference between milestone and periodic billing? Answer: Periodic: - full amount in each bill till contract period Milestone: - partial amount in each bill till full amount is billed. Milestone billing is a billing plan type where the customer have to pay the amount in parts within the billing date e.g. suppose the bill amount of the customer is 1000 usd, the customer can pay 200usd,300usd as mentioned on the Agreement whereas in periodic plan type the customer have to pay the amount in a regular periodic interval.i.e. The customer have to pay the 1000usd in 1 year then the amount payable by the customer is 1000/12. Q.What is the difference between Static and Dynamic Credit Check? Answer: They both are belong to automatic credit check The only difference is Dynamic contains a time/horizon/attach period .This time period used by the system where we specify time in months .EX: 2 months .System will use this period to take open orders, open deliveries etc. to get credit exposure .Within this attached time period not after this specified period, u have to do delivery after this horizon period say 3 months latter the delivery date so system will not calculate this date static check will carry out the open sales orders +open deliveries +open billing + open items, dynamic check= static check+ time horizon Q.What are the issues u have faced in integration testing? Answer: GL ACCOUNT CANNOT BE DETERMINED DURING INVOICING MOVEMENT TYPE NOT FOUND DURING DELIVERY STORAGE UNIT NOT FOUND IN THE BIN ERROR DURING TRANSFER ORDER CREATION FOR DELIVERY ROUTE NOT DETERMINED DURING DELIVERY TOR CANNOT BE DONE DURING DELIVERY ETC... Q.What is the difference between condition type EK01 and EK02? Answer: Ek01- the result of unit costing can be used as base for price (pr00) determination. Ek02- the result of unit costing simply taken as a statistical value Q.What is the Function of item category group? Answer: The item category group determines how a material is processed in the sales order. It defines, for example, that pricing does not take place for a free of charge item, such as a business gift; or that inventory management is not carried out for a service. When processing sales and distribution documents, the system uses the item category group to determine the item category. The system determines the item category based on the item category group of the material and the current business transaction, and proposes it in the respective document. hen creating the material types non-stock material and services, DIEN is proposed in both cases for the item category group, because the order processing for both material types is identical: for example, pricing is carried out for both, but no availability check. Q.What is pricing procedure? Answer: A pricing procedure is a procedure by where in which you control the execution of condition types in a sequence you would like . It not only executes the condition types but als0 controls the execution of condition type by the use of requirements , altcv. altcbv, account key. Pricing procedure is a systematic and sequential use of condition types to arrive at a right value of the product.To determine the pricing procedure SALES AREA (Sales Organization + Distribution Channel +Division) + CUSTOMER PRICING PROCEDURE + DOCUMENT PRICING PROCEDURE Q.What is condition exclusion? Answer: If we set an exclusion indicator in the definition of condition type during sales document processing the system ignores the other condition type which exits below that in the pricing procedure and which have same requirement. Q.Which delivery document type for STO process? Answer: For intracompany STO the delivery doc type is NL(i.e. within the one company code)& for intercompany STO the delivery type is NLCC. Q.What is difference between the header level condition and item level condition? Answer: Header level conditions are for the whole document, while item level condition is for the particular item only. header conditions do not have access sequences and condition records, too. Q.What is the link between credit management and subtotals? Answer: There is the link between credit management and subtotals. The reason why, Business grant credit to the customer. so all the credit amounts of customer must stored in corresponding tables in our sap system. so that In Pricing procedure for the condition type Net value we assign A In the field Subtotal. the table for credits is komp-cmpre Q.What is Delivery group and what is its purpose? Answer: delivery group is grouping of all sub item to be delivery at one time. mostly used in bill of materials. Q.What is main purpose of maintaining the master data? Answer: IN SAP we can call these are master data like: 1. Customer master data 2. Material master data 3. Customer material Information record 4. When we are maintaining condition records like pricing Condition record, rebate condition record. THE main purpose of maintaining the master data is that when we will create any documents in sales like sales document, the data regarding customer is coming from customer master and the data regarding material is coming from material master, and for example in the sales order the delivery plant is coming from CMIR,OR CUSTOMER MASTER OR,MATERIAL MASTER ,like this... Q.What is line item? Answer: There are 3 levels in a sales document i.e. header level, item level and schedule line. Line item falls in the Item Level. 1)Line Item relates to material details or the item details such as item number, name of material, quantity etc. 2)The item category of the item which is determined by the system (by combination of Item Category Group from Material Master, Sales Document Type, Usage and higher level item category)is copied at Item Level of the sales documents. 3)Line Item contains the value and quantity also which are not normally found at Header Level. 4)Examples of Line items are : Material, Order Quantity, Material Group, Plant, Shipping Point, Route, Customer Material, Sales Unit, price/discount/tax/freight per unit, etc. 5)Examples of Header data will make Line Item more clear : Sold-to Party, Pricing date, Document currency, Price group, Customer Group, Incoterms, Payment terms, Purchase Order Number etc. Q.What is value SAP? Answer: ASAP methodology is a methodology for component-based implementation projects. Value SAP methodology is a methodology for evaluation, implementation and continuous business improvement. Solution Manager is a natural extension of Accelerated SAP and Value SAP methodology. SAP SM is mandatory for all Business Suite 2005 and beyond. Q.What happens when you overrate the customer? Answer: You can opt for any of the following 3 : 1)credit the customer for the amount of short-charged invoice by creating a Credit Memo Request with reference to the previous invoice and create a new sales order with correct rate 2)you can make a Credit Memo Request for the overcharged amount and make a Credit Note Billing Document to give credit for the difference amount 3)you may make an Invoice Correction Request. Q.What are the functions performed in a support client? Answer: The main function is resolving the day to day issues sent by the client. some times enhancements also.And also read the detailed ticket issues Q.What is the access sequence for header conditions? Answer: For header conditions, no access sequence will be there. the values for header conditions should be entered manually during sales order processing. access sequence is a search strategy which finds the right condition record from the condition table. Q.What are the highest organizational units in SD, MM, PP and FICO? Answer: SD----sales organization MM----plant PP----plant FICO-----company code Q.What is the functionality of negative posting in billing document? Answer: Reverse and adjustment postings can also be marked as negative postings. Negative postings are used to reduce the transaction figures in G/L, customer, and vendor accounts. This allows you to give the transaction figures (following the reversal) the status they would have had without posting the reversed document and its reversal document. This type of reversal is called a negative posting. Its nothing but an adjustment. Lets say you have creates a bill of 10 bucks and latter you realize its not correct and the billing amount should be 8 bucks. To change the billing amount you have to create a negative bill worth -2 bucks. Its a negative bill or in other words its an adjustment of credit type. Similarly debit type adjustments are also there. Q.What is mean of Rebate processing? Answer: Rebate is nothing but a special discount which is given on to specific customer on certain sales volume with in specific period of time. Rebate may given on a specific customer, if he do the targeted business within the validity periods, A rebate is a discount which is granted subsequently to a rebate recipient on the basis of defined sales volume within certain period. There are three processes on rebate. 1:- Configuring Rebate 2:- Setting of rebate agreements 3:- managing rebate agreement & payments But before the processing the rebate you need to activate the following fields :- in Payer master record :- Sales organization :- Billing document type. You have following rebate agreement types for your customer. 1:- Material rebate 2:- customer rebate 3:- customer Hierarchy rebate 4:- Material group rebate 5:- Independent of sales volume. Q.How is shipping point determined? Answer: shipping conditions + loading group + Delivery plant = Shipping point Q.What is the client specific data? Answer: Client specific data refer to the data that can be accesses only when we log in to that Client Client specific data: a) Business data--Master data of business partners, products, pricing etc b) Transaction data: Sales orders, delivery, billing documents etc c) Customization data: All the IMG activities that are saved with Customizing request number form the client specific data Q.What is ABAP debugging? Answer: Finding the errors in ABAP program and rectifying the error at run time is done using ABAP debugging. The ABAP debugger is the development workbench tool, which allows you stop a program during its execution when a particular condition is met. Q.How subtotal in pp is related to credit limit? Answer: subtotal field(A) in the pp contains the total value and this value is checked with the credit limit of the customer. Q.What is the difference between discount and rebate? Answer: Rebate: an incentive to be given to a customer. clubbed with qty purchased by a customer within the period specified (say one month)-conditional. Discount doesn’t depends upon the turnover it is fixed. and can only differ from customer to customer Q.What will you do in blue print stage? Answer: Business Blue print is a detailed documentation of the requirements gathered from client. it represents the business process requirements of the company. It is an agreed statement of how the company intends to run its business within SAP system. Q.What is cut over strategy? Answer: Cutover strategy or cutover plan is the activity done in ASAP methodology, while transferring the data from the legacy system to the sap system. At this point of time the billing will be stopped, all the open orders, contracts, pricing data will be transferred as per the cutover plan which is provided by the implementation partner. Whatever you want to do on the system u need to do before or after this activity. Q.What is the relation between PGI and TOR? Answer: Depending up on TOR PGI takes place let me explain how it takes place when a requirement comes this is been transferred to MRP through TOR. Depending up on the availability of the material transfer of order takes place in which the requirement sits in the storage location from there picking and packing process takes place and finally PGI activity takes place. In general IN GENERAL TERMENOLOGY TOR IS THE ACTIVITY WHICH TAKES PLACE BEFORE CREATING A DELIVERY DOCUMENT AND PGI PROCESS TAKES PLACE AFTER CREATING A DELIVERY DOCUMENT. Q.How is route determined? Answer: Determination of the route is dependent on the following factors: (1)Departure Country and departure zone-it gets determined from shipping point. (2)Shipping Condition:-it is determined from sales doc. type or from SP (Customer master). (3)Transportation Group:- it is determined from Material master. (4) transportation Zone:- ship -to -party. (5)Receiving country. (6)Weight group (optional). Q.What is consumption based planning? Answer: Consumption-based planning is based on past consumption-values, statistical procedures for future requirements. It’s to avoid the shortfall in requirement determined from reorder point or forecast requirement. Difference between MRP and Consumption-based planning, MRP Planning based on gross requirement through the Bill of Materials, Consumption-based planning based on past consumption-values. Q.What is the relation ship between sales organization and plants? Answer: (1)Sales Organization--> Plant Sales Organization is assigned to plant in combination with Distribution Channel. Relation: Many-Many. (2) sales Organization--> Company Code. Many-One. (3) Plant-->Company Code. Many-One. Q.what does Item Category Control? Answer: An item category controls the overall behavior of an item. It determines whether the item is relevant for pricing or not, whether it is relevant for delivery or not, whether it is relevant for billing or not. It also determines whether it is a free item, text item and it also help to determine the sales document type. Q.What is Returnable packaging processing means? Answer: IT is used in the process where by the business sells items to the customer. These items are packed into shipping units such as boxes and crates .Then the customer can keep the boxes and crates upto a certain period of time and then must return the item .Should the customer not have return the shipping units within specified date or have been destroyed ,then business may bill the customer for damaged goods . The stock we deliver as special packaging materials .We kept at customer site .It can viewed in "MMBE"with indicator "V" . Item category group is "VERP" . General item category is "LEIH". "LAN" for returnable packaging pick up-(LA) "LNN" for returnable packaging issue-(LN) Material group =00804 "TAL" -item category for returnable packaging Q.What is IMG? Answer: 1. Step by Step plan for implementing the SAP modules. 2. Procedures that have to be performed before a certain configuration can be made. 3. Documenting the SAP R/3 configuration methodology along with the reasons for configurations. 4. It forms the crux of business transactions in an SAP implementation, and how each one of the steps in various modules have been configured. 5. Finally, all configurations and their releases for a particular SAP R/3 implementation can be checked through the SAP IMG. Q.What is Backorder processing? Answer: Backorder processing is functionality in SAP where you can change the commitments and over-ride the blockage of stocks marked against sales documents/deliveries. For e.g. you receive an order from a very important customer for material "A" but the entire quantity of A is committed to another customer "B" via earlier sales orders and this is where BACKORDER processing helps you to change the commitment and shift stock due for B to A. This is the benefit of this functionality. T.C.: V_RA - Backorder Processing Q.What are the influencing factors for account determination? Answer: sales amount which is in sales order will be posted into some accounts. eg: sales price should be posted into revenues account in the same way sales discount should be posted into deduction account , other amount will post into some other account for this purpose we maintain account determination. coming to the question's answer, influencing factors for account determination is , chart of accounts,( FI consultant will tell that chart of accounts which is used for that company code) sales organization, distribution channel, account assignment group for customer ( which is in customer master data, sales area tab page, billing view )account assignment group for material ( which is in material master record, sales organization 1 view ( not sure plz check) account key which is assigned in pricing procedure G/L account number ( FI consultant will give this number) Q.What are dependencies in variant configuration? Answer: Dependencies establish relationship between characteristics and values of different characteristics. It is required to get the pricing to the sales order through Procedure(dependency), to get the BOM component selected for the material with quantity and to have the routing time for each component. There are 5-types of dependencies... a.Precondition ...to hide characteristics and its values b.Selection condition....to select a characteristics or values c.Procedure..to Infer value for a characteristics d.Action...to infer value for a characteristics but obsolete. e.Constraint...to have a consistency value flow to configuration , it has to attach to configuration through dependency net.... Q.What is Extract used in condition tech. in pricing? Answer: Condition technique used condition table, condition type, access sequence, pricing procedure to determine pricing information. Q.What is the use of pricing date in condition type? Answer: Pricing date is the date in which the condition records are accessed. For e.g.: lets say you have the price of the material as 1000Rs till Mar 2008 as per the validity period of condition record and from April the same price of the material is 2000Rs as per the validity period of the condition record. Now your pricing date in the Sales doc determines as which price should be taken into account. Hope you are clear now. Q.What is the link/control between sales and distribution and quality? Answer: When a complaint is executed. Say, a faulty material is returned back to plant from the customer/consignee. The material is taken in to the blocked stock, where by the quality link is involved. It's the responsibility of the quality department to check the complaint and approve. That's the reason we have billing block before issuing credit note/memo to the customer. Q.How is access seq. controlled? Answer: An access sequence (search strategy) is defined for each condition type (except header and manual condition type) in pricing procedure. 1. Each access performed during pricing procedure, the access sequence is made using condition table. 2. Access sequence is a search key for condition record, which made up of key fields. 3. Access sequence searches the condition records from most specific to the most general. Example: Suppose you create a sale order for material M-10 for Customer 1500. and you had maintained the condition records for that material 100 INR for per material. and you also maintained the condition record for Customer1500/Material M-10 also i.e. for that particular material and for that customer the Material price is 90 INR. In that condition the system pick the material price as 90 INR and reject the material discount as 100INR. Q.What is business item? Answer: In item category, Business item specifies whether the business data at the item level is allow to differ from business data in the document header during the sales document processing. business data means sales data + shipping data + Billing data If you configure (Check box active) the Business item in the Item category, system should not allow to change the Incoterms in the sales order Q.What is Lump sum payment? Answer: Lump sum payment is a general term. It has no different meaning in the sap. Exact meaning of lump sum is full payment. Q.what are the Steps in consignment processing? Answer: In consignment process, we have 4 stages. First phase, company fill the goods at customer site, still it is the property of company, is called as Consignment fill up,(CF) When the customer consumes the material company issues the invoice is called as consignment issue (CI) If the customer finds that he got any material defective he returns is called as consignment return (CR) When customer requests the company to take back the material which is not sold by the consumer, the company will pick this stock from the customer site is known as consignment pick up (cp) Q.What is the purpose of creating user exits? Answer: A user exit is a place in a software program where a customer can arrange for their own tailor-made program to be called. SAP creates user exits for specific programs, screens, and menus within standard R/3 applications.These exits do not contain any functionality. Instead, the customer exits act as hooks. You can hang your own add-on functionality onto these hooks Q.What is the difference between VK11 & VK31 Answer: Tcode vk11 used for individual Maintenance of condition record and Tcode vk31 used for mass Maintenance of condition record Q.What basic questions do they ask relating to order management? Answer: Basic questions related to order management 1. In sale order what fields are mandatory We can change them as per our requirement by going into account groups and then fields 2. When u raise a sale order what field get filled by default? 3. when you save a sale order what’s the background process which takes place? Q.How is storage location determined? Answer: Determination of storage location depends upon the rule mentioned in the delivery type. There are basically three rules for determining storage location, out of which we basically use MALA rule:- MALA Rule:- (1)Shipping point. (2)Plant. (3)Storage Condition. Other rules are MARE and RETA ,which are used for trade scenarios. Q.What is the difference between ATP check and availability check? Answer: ATP is know as available to promise quantities and it is Calculated as below. Ware house stock + planned receipts - Planned issues = ATP quantities. Ex1. 100 + 50 -75 = 75 is ATP Quantity Any remaining open quantity in the movement is regarded as the ATP quantity and can be used to fulfill the next Requirement. Ex2. 25 + 100 -150 = -25 ATP Quantity, In this case the system try to capture the stock from other inward movement and try and match the order quantity 150.and even this is not available and partially met then the system shows the negative ATP Quantities in the requirement line. During the availability check the system determines the ATP quantities for the material and the plant. The system behaves in performing the availability check based on how the availability check is set in customizing. This can be viewed in the sales order, over view screen procurement and you can see the confirmed quantity and ATP Quantity. Availability check: Stock checks which is automatically carried out after every goods movement and which should prevent the book inventory balance of physical stock (for example, available stock) from reaching zero. types of Availability checks 1. Against ATP 2. Against product allocation 3. Against planning. Availability check is based on checking group, Requirement class, and Requirement type and schedule line category. Q.What will do in realization? Answer: Realization phase in which the system is configured ,knowledge transfer occurs ,extensive unit testing is completed, and data mapping and data requirements for migration are defined . The purpose of this phase is to implement the business process requirements based on business blueprint. The system configuration methodology is provided in two work packages :baseline(major scope) and final configuration (remaining scope).Other main focal area of this phase are conducting integration tests and drawing up end user documentation. Q.What is the importance of release status and dynamic field? Answer: The importance of release status in release procedures is to create the condition records purely for the planning purpose. for further clarification see release procedures in pricing. The Dynamic field check is to determine the customer-specific fields, even the text fields. Q.What is the parent and child relationship? Answer: when after we r creating the IDOC type it will show screen, there we can create the segments by right click. then one pop up window will display like which segment(Ex: SEG1) u need to add to the IDOC then add the one more segment(Ex:SEG2) to the IDOC . while add SEg2 to the IDOC , pop up will display like segment name which u can add and there is the options like under which segment u need to create the segment here u can select SEG1. now SEG1 ----> parent segment SEG2 ----> child to the SEG1 Q.How to configure partial deliveries? Answer: we have to mark for partial delivery either in customer master or In customer-material info. Q.What is ABAP query? Answer: ABAP/4 Query is a powerful tool to generate simple reports without any coding. ABAP/4 Query can generate the following 3 simple reports: Basic List: It is the simple reports. Statistics: Reports with statistical functions like average, Percentages. Ranked Lists: For analytical reports. – For creating a ABAP/4 Query, programmer has to create user group and a functional group. Functional group can be created using with or without logical database table. Finally, assign user group to functional group. Finally, create a query on the functional group generated. Q.How is step and counter differentiated? Answer: Step Number is used to specify the sequential order for condition types. Counter is used when two or more Condition Types required the same Step Number. Ex : Step No. Counter C.Type 10 5 KOFI 10 10 KOFK step is sequential order of a condition type. counter is nothing but sub sequential number of a condition type. Q.What are the effects of PGI? Answer: the ownership of goods will be transferred with post goods issue and it updates the stock quantity in warehouse decreases the volume of stock and increase the goods sold.and also updates the postings to G.L.A/C Q.What is condition supplement and why is it used? Answer: What are the Techniques in delivery scheduling? Backward scheduling & Forward Scheduling Backward scheduling: System calculates material availability date based on the Requested delivery date. If the material is not available on that date the system calculates the earliest possible delivery date based on the material available date. Forward Scheduling Q.What is Replenishment lead time? Answer: RLT=The time taken by the material to be replenished For trading goods: ------------------ RLT=plant delivery time+goods reciept processing time For finished goods: ------------------- RLT=Inhouse production time Q.Where is shipping conditions stored? Answer: Shipping conditions are maintained in two places one is in customer master record under sales tab page in shipping screen and another is in sale document type. If u maintain in sale document type it over writes the value maintained in customer-material info. Q.What is material determination? Answer: This is setup when business requires swapping of one material by the other material in a sales document. Example - When a product is under engineering change or there is a bug and you have another product, which is acceptable as replacement, then material determination can be used to set this scenario. Old product can be replaced by new product as per the launch date of the product. Material determination is also called as “Product selection” *It uses condition technique for material *Material determination procedure is based on the sales document type. With condition technique, criteria can be defined and condition records can be maintained. *Standard material determination procedure for order type OR is A00001. *Standard material determination condition type is A001 *With standard setup, condition record for swap materials is maintained for “material entered”. It means in standard SAP, material determination is triggered when material is entered in the sales order. *Additional criteria can be added by customizing condition type A001. *Material condition records are maintained in the main transaction menu in master data Swapping can be based on certain business conditions. These are called as Substitution reasons. For each substitution reason, you can define substitution strategy. *Substitution strategy controls *System will automatically replace product as per material determination record after carrying out availability check or can give list of substitute products for users to check and select or replace material without availability check. It can also control whether both substituted and substitute material can be displayed in the sales order or only substitute material is to be displayed in the sales order. *It controls printing of substituted or substitute material on output types like order confirmations. *In delivery, no material determination is carried out for items copied from the order. *Material determination in a delivery is carried out for new items if material determination has been activated for the corresponding sales document type Q.What is the central organizational element in purchasing? Answer: Purchasing Organization. Q.How is plant determined? Answer: System searches for the plant in the following manner:- (1) first it searches for a plant from CMIR(customer-material info record). (2)If it is not found there then it will search for a plant in Customer master record of ship-to-party. (3)If still it could not be found then it will check in material master in Sales general/Plant view. in this sequence the plant is determined. Q.What is difference between listing and exclusion? Answer: 1. Listing is nothing but whatever material u assign to particular customer, then he can access those materials .But exclusion is nothing but excluding the Particular material to the customer, then customer cannot access those materials. For example-In pharmaceutical company, customer sometimes the customer may not have a license to sell certain product, then we can use this function. 2.Listing is suppose for a certain or group of customers u can assign materials only those can access. Exclusion is suppose u don’t want that certain materials certain customer should not access .So the particular customer can not purchase the same . Always exclusion is having higher priority than listing. In exclusion the system refuses the entered materials if it is maintained in exclusion record for specific customer but in case of material listing it accepts only allowed material which we maintained in listing record for specific customer . Q.How revenue account is determined? Answer: Revenue a/c is determination : 1. Application 2. Chart of accounts 3. Sales Org 4. Condition type 5. Account assignment group from customer 6. Account assignment group from material 7. Account key Q.When will you combine deliveries into one invoice? Answer: we will combine multiple deliveries into one invoice, when the bill to party , payment terms and billing date is same. And also when billing date, that means billing is done only once in a month for that particular customer, then you combine all deliveries of that month create invoice Contact for more information SAP SD Online Training

SAP Security Interview Questions

Q.How to create users? Answer: Execute transaction SU01 and fill in all the field. When creating a new user, you must enter an initial password for that user on the Logon data tab. All other data is optional. Q.Tell me frequent used SAP Security T-codes Q.Frequently used security T-codes Answer: SU01 Create/ Change User SU01 Create/ Change User PFCG Maintain Roles SU10 Mass Changes SU01D Display User SUIM Reports ST01 Trace SU53 Authorization analysis Q.What is the difference between USOBX_C and USOBT_C? Answer: The table USOBX_C defines which authorization checks are to be performed within a transaction and which not (despite authority-check command programmed ). This table also determines which authorization checks are maintained in the Profile Generator. The table USOBT_C defines for each transaction and for each authorization object which default values an authorization created from the authorization object should have in the Profile Generator. Q.Authorization are required to create and maintain user master records? Answer: The following authorization objects are required to create and maintain user master records: S_USER_GRP: User Master Maintenance: Assign user groups S_USER_PRO: User Master Maintenance: Assign authorization profile S_USER_AUT: User Master Maintenance: Create and maintain authorizations Q.List R/3 User Types Answer: Dialog users are used for individual user. Check for expired/initial passwords Possible to change your own password. Check for multiple dialog logon A Service user - Only user administrators can change the password. No check for expired/initial passwords. Multiple logon permitted System users are not capable of interaction and are used to perform certain system activities, such as background processing, ALE, Workflow, and so on. A Reference user is, like a System user, a general, non-personally related, user. Additional authorizations can be assigned within the system using a reference user. A reference user for additional rights can be assigned for every user in the Roles tab. Q.What is a derived role? Answer: Derived roles refer to roles that already exist. The derived roles inherit the menu structure and the functions included (transactions, reports, Web links, and so on) from the role referenced. A role can only inherit menus and functions if no transaction codes have been assigned to it before. The higher-level role passes on its authorizations to the derived role as default values which can be changed afterwards. Organizational level definitions are not passed on. They must be created anew in the inheriting role. User assignments are not passed on either. Derived roles are an elegant way of maintaining roles that do not differ in their functionality (identical menus and identical transactions) but have different characteristics with regard to the organizational level. Q.What is a composite role? Answer: A composite role is a container which can collect several different roles. For reasons of clarity, it does not make sense and is therefore not allowed to add composite roles to composite roles. Composite roles are also called roles. Composite roles do not contain authorization data. If you want to change the authorizations (that are represented by a composite role), you must maintain the data for each role of the composite role. Creating composite roles makes sense if some of your employees need authorizations from several roles. Instead of adding each user separately to each role required, you can set up a composite role and assign the users to that group. The users assigned to a composite role are automatically assigned to the corresponding (elementary) roles during comparison. Q,What does user compare do? Answer: If you are also using the role to generate authorization profiles, then you should note that the generated profile is not entered in the user master record until the user master records have been compared. You can automate this by scheduling report FCG_TIME_DEPENDENCY on a daily. Q.Can we convert Authorization field to Org, field Answer: Authorization field can be changed to Organization field using PFCG_ORGFIELD_CREATE or ZPFCG_ORGFIELD_CREATE Use SE38 or SA38 to run the above report. Organizational level fields should only be created before you start setting up your system. If you create organizational level fields later, you might have to do an impact analysis. The authentication data may have to be postprocessed in roles. The fields "Activity", "ACTVT" and "Transaction code", "TCD" cannot be converted into an organizational level field. In addition, all affected roles are analyzed and the authorization data is adjusted. The values of the authorization field which is now to become the organizational level field are removed and entered into the organizational level data of the role. Q.How many profiles can be assigned to any user master record. Answer: Maximum Profiles that can be assigned to any user is ~ 312. Table USR04 (Profile assignments for users). This table contains both information on the change status of a user and also the list of the profile names that were assigned to the user. The field PROFS is used for saving the change flag (C = user was created, M = user was changed), and the name of the profiles assigned to the user. The field is defined with a length of 3750 characters. Since the first two characters are intended for the change flag, 3748 characters remain for the list of the profile names per user. Because of the maximum length of 12 characters per profile name, this results in a maximum number of 312 profiles per user. Q.Can you add a composite role to another composite role? Answer: No Q. How to reset SAP* password from oracle database. Logon to your database with orasid as user id and run this sql delete from sapSID.usr02 where bname='SAP*' and mandt='XXX'; commit; Where mandt is the client. Now you can login to the client using sap* and password pass SAP Security Interview Questions SAP Security Interview Questions and Answers Q.What is difference between role and profile. Answer: A role act as container that collect transaction and generates the associated profile. The profile generator (PFCG) in SAP System automatically generates the corresponding authorization profile. Developer used to perform this step manually before PFCG was introduced bySAP. Any maintenance of the generated profile should be done using PFCG. Q.What is user buffer? Answer: When a user logs on to the SAP R/3 System, a user buffer is built containing all authorizations for that user. Each user has their own individual user buffer. For example, if user Smith logs on to the system, his user buffer contains all authorizations of role USER_SMITH_ROLE. The user buffer can be displayed in transaction SU56. A user would fail an authorization check if: The authorization object does not exist in the user buffer The values checked by the application are not assigned to the authorization object in the user buffer The user buffer contains too many entries and has overflowed. The number of entries in the user buffer can be controlled using the system profile parameter auth/number_in_userbuffer. How to find out all roles with T-code SU01? Answer: You can use SUIM > Roles by complex criteria or RSUSR070 to find out this. Go to the Selection by Authorization Value. In Object 1 put S_TCODE and hit enter. And put SU01 in Transaction code and hit execute (clock with check) button. I use authorization object, as you can use this to test any object. You can also get this information directly from table, if you have access to SE16 or SE16N. Execute SE16N Table AGR_1251 Object S_TCODE VALUE (low) SU01 Q.How to find out all the users who got SU01 ? Answer: You can use SUIM >User by complex criteria or (RSUSR002) to find this out. Go to the Selection by Authorization Value. In Object 1 put S_TCODE and hit enter. And put SU01 in Transaction code and hit execute (clock with check) button. I use authorization object, as you can use this to test any object. Q.How to find out all the roles for one composite role or a selection of composite roles? Answer: Execute SE16N Table AGR_AGRS Composite roles You can put multiple composite roles using the more button Q.How to find out all the derived roles for one or more Master (Parent) roles? Answer: Execute SE16N Table AGR_DEFINE Use either agr_name field or Parent_agr field. Q.How can I check all the Organization value for any role? Answer: Execute SE16N Table AGR_1252 Role Type in the role here and hit execute. You can always download all the information to spreadsheet also using . Q.How do I restrict access to files through AL11? Answer: First create an alias. Go to t-code AL11 > configure > create alias. Let say we are trying to restrict alias DIR_TEMP which is /tmp. Open PFCG and assign t-code AL11, and change the authorization for S_DATASET as mentioned below Activity 33 Physical file name /tmp/* Program Name with Search Help * Q.How can I add one role to many users? Answer: SU10. If you have less than 16 users then you can paste the userids. If you have more than 16 users – Click on Authorization data and click on next to users and upload from clipboard . Hit the change button and go to the role tab and add the roles to be assigned and hit save. Q.What are the Best practices for locking expired users? Answer: Lock the user. Remove all the roles and profiles assigned to the user. Move them to TERM User group. Q.How can be the password rules enforced ? Answer: Password rules can be enforced using profile parameter. Follow the link to learn more about the profile parameter. Q.How to remove duplicate roles with different start and end date from user master? Answer: You can use PRGN_COMPRESS_TIMES to do this. Please refer to note 365841 for more info. Q.How come the users have authorization in PFCG, but user still complains with no authorization? Answer: Make sure the user master is compared. May be the there is a user buffer overflow Also check the profile- Follow the instruction below. SUIM > User by complex criteria. Put the userid of user who is having issue. Execute Double click on the user id and expand the tree. Select the profile in question and see if the authorization is correct or not. If not do the role reorg in PFCG and see if that helps. How can I have a display all roles.? Answer: Copy sap_all and open the role and change the activity to 03 and 08 How can I find out all actvt in sap? Answer: All possible activities (ACTVT) are stored in table TACT (transaction SM30), and also the valid activities for each authorization object can be found in table TACTZ (transaction SE16). Q.How many fields can be present in one Authorization object? Answer: 10 fields. Q.How to check the table Logs ? Answer: First, we need to check if the logging is activated for table using tcode SE13. If table logging is enabled then we can see the table logs in t-code SCU3. Q. What’s the basic difference in between SU22 & SU24 ? Answer: SU22 displays and updates the values in tables USOBT and USOBX, while SU24 does the same in tables USOBT_C and USOBX_C. The _C stands for Customer. The profile generator gets its data from the _C tables. In the USOBT and USOBX tables the values are the SAP standard values as shown in SU24. With SU25 one can (initially) transfer the USOBT values to the USOBT_C table. Q.How to remove duplicate roles with different start and end date from user master ? Answer: You can use PRGN_COMPRESS_TIMES to do this. For More Contact SAP Security Online Training

SAP UI5 Interview Questions

Which Control Libraries Are Used For Ui5 Application Development? Ans: sap.ui.commons, sap.ui.table and sap.suite.ui libraries for desktop application development and sap.m library along with sap.ui.layout for Fiori application development. How Navigation Works In Sapui5? Ans: Sap uses two mechanisms, routing and EventBus. Routing Is specifically used for bookmarking the URL. We define routing in component.js within the metadata. It also defines the navigation path and hash changer which is used at the runtime to change the url of the particular screen. What Is Component? Ans: It is the first point of the application, it serves as an index, which encapsulates all the application details, like view names, routing details, main view, applications type(Full Screen or SplitApp), application service configuration etc. There are 2 types of compponents: Faceless components: Mainly without UIs, Used for business logic and helper methods e.g. Formatters. UI Component: typically component.js file which is made by extending sap.ui.core.UI Component class. What Is Responsive Web Design? Ans: A web application which gives same look and feel to the user in desktops and mobile devices. What Is The Syntax To Define A Control In Ui5? Ans: var obj_name = new sap.m.ControlName(“id of control”,{ properties, events, aggregations }); What Is Formatter In Sapui5 And How To Use It? Ans: We need to use formatter when we need to perform some changes on the back end property data on the front end. we can use formatter while data binding to a property like as follows: oControl = new sap.ui.commons.TextField({ value : {path : “/path”, formatter : function(oEvent){ return “Value:”+oEvent; }}}); How Many Types Of Views Are Available In Sapui5? Ans: There are 4 types of views available: JS view JSON view XML view HTML view How Many Types Of Data Model Are Available In Sapui5? Ans: SAPUI5 has following predefined four data models available: JSON Model:Client-side model, supports two way binding. XML Model: Client-side model and intended for small data sets this is very rarely used model. Resource Model: This is also client side model used to maintain resource bundles, specially texts. ODATA Model: This is most important model of the four provided. What All Events/life Cycle Are Available In Sapui5’s Views Controller? Ans: There are 4 lifecycle available in SAPUI5’s views controller, they are: onInit()– it is called when a view is instantiated and its controls have already been created. onExit()– it is called when the view is destroyed, used to free resources and finalize activities. onAfterRendering()- when the view has been rendered and, therefore, its HTML is part of the document. onBeforeRendering()-It is called before the controller view is re-rendered and not before the first rendering. What Is The Main Difference Between Odata Model And Json Model? Ans: The JSON model is a client-side model and, therefore, intended for small datasets, which are completely available on the client.The OData model is a server-side model: the dataset is only available on the server and the client only knows the currently visible rows and fields. What Is Sapui5 Bootstrapping? Ans: SAPUI5 Bootstrapping means loading and initializing SAPUI5 in any HTML page. Themes and Libraries are defined in this. In How Many Ways You Can Bind Data To Your Controls? Ans: We can bind data to any controls using three methods, Property, Element and Aggregation binding. What Are Sapui5 Fragments? Ans: Fragments are very light weight UI controls. Fragments are not completely like views but they act like a view. Fragments are defined similar like views and are names like “Fragment.fragment.xml“. Does Fragment Have Its Own Controller? Ans: Fragments are created without controllers, they don’t have their own controllers they share controller of the view which is invoking it. What Is Metadata Annotations? Ans: The service metadata document describes the structure of all resources in the service. This structural metadata makes it easy to understand a service. We can explore service metadata at the address “$metadata” relative to the service root. What Are Common Metadata Annotations? Ans: Following are some of the service metadata annotations which are common and a front end developer must know these in order to understand the service and integrate it: edm:EntityContainer edm:EntitySet edm:EntityType edm:Property edm:NavigationProperty edm:AssociationSet What Is Sap Fiori? Ans: SAPUI5 is client side HTML5 rendering framework or library and SAP FIORI is collection of and released as waves of applications which are completely based on SAPUI5 framework. It means we can create applications using SAPUI5 framework and SAP FIORI is final product i.e. application. In SAPUI5 we have to code from scratch, but in Fiori Application the custom application is already built and enhancements can be done on those custom apps. How Many Types Of Fiori Applications Are There? Ans: There are 3 types of fiori applications: Transactional Analytical Fact Sheets What Is The Difference Between Sap Fiori And Sapui5? Ans: SAP FIORI is collection of standard applications based on SAPUI5 library provided by SAP. SAP FIORI applications share some standard design guidelines and way in which these application are developed. What Is Fiori Launchpad And Explain It? Ans: It is a home page for all the FIORI applications provided to. There are more than five hundred custom app provided by SAP. This shows tile based UI where every UI redirects to assigned FIORI application. This Launchpad is fully customizable according to your needs like theming and all. How Can You Get The Web Browser Of The Client On Which Sap Fiori Application Is Running? Ans: SAPUI5 library provides a special API “sap.ui.Device“which can be used to for device and its feature detection. This API provides flags like “chrome”, “firefox”, “mozilla”, “edge” etc. in “sap.ui.Device.browser” API which returns boolean values. What Are Fiori Design Principles? Ans: There are 5 design principles we need to keep in mind while designing SAP Fiori applications. Role Based Delightful Simple Responsive Coherent Which Open Standards And Tools Are The Foundation Of Sapui5 Technology? Ans: js for visualization ARIA for accessibility standards and keyboard handling jQuery for managing DOM elements and abstracting browser differences What Sapui5 Control Metadata Is Used To Configure The Ui Elements At Runtime? Ans: Associations Properties Aggregations What Are View Types Offered By Sapui5? Ans: JavaScript views JSON views XML views What Is The Purpose Of A Controller? Ans: To separate the UI and the processing logic To control the application flow by handling user events or updating the view Name Some Standard Controller Hooks In Sapui5? Ans: onInit– an event that is called when the view and the controller are instantiated onExit– an event that is called when the view and the controller are destroyed What Information Can Be Stored In The Manifest.json File Of Your App? Ans: Root view Supported device types Supported themes Which Of The Following Namespaces Can Be Used In The Manifest.json File? Ans: ui5 app ui What Is The Name Of The File Where The Descriptor For Applications, Components, And Libraries Is Stored? Ans: Manifest.json For What Stands The Abbreviation Json? Ans: Java Script Object Notation Which Data Binding Mode Means A Binding From The Model To The View And From The View To The Model (value Changes In The Model And In The View Update All Corresponding Bindings And The View And Model, Respectively)? Ans: Two-way How Would You Add An Icon From The Sapui5 Icon Font To A Button In An Xml View? Ans: Which Predefined Sizes For Margins That Stand For 8px (0.5rem), 16px (1rem), 32px (2rem), Or 48px (3rem) Are Available In Sapui5? Answer : 'Tiny', 'Small', 'Medium' or 'Large' What Is Aggregation Binding Used For? Ans: To bind a set of data entities to a list-like structure What Do You Need If You Want To Bind A List To Data In Your Jsonmodel? Ans: An array with the data in the JSONModel that you want to bind to the list A template list item to be cloned A bound list control How Can You Access Validation Errors In Sapui5? Ans: Set handleValidation to true in the manifest.json file. Register to the validationError event on sap.ui.getCore(). Name Some Types In Sapui5? Ans: ui.model.type.Float ui.model.type.DateTime ui.model.type.Currency What Coding Do You Need To Add To Your Xml View To Enable Grouping In Your List Binding? Ans: group: true Which Of The Following Sequences Of Steps Do You Use To Assemble The Url To Access Your Odata Service's Metadata? Ans: Run your app from SAP Web IDE and copy its URL into a new browser tab. In your app's manifest.json file, go to “services”, copy the URI, and use it to replace the file path in the URL from Step 1. Append “/$metadata” and press enter. How Many Filters Can You Apply On A List Binding? Ans: As many as needed What Is The Best Practice For Showing Or Hiding An Sapui5 Control At Runtime? Ans: Set the “visible” property of the control to “true” or “false”. When Do You Use Element Binding? Ans: When you want bindings of child controls to resolve their paths relative to the binding of the parent What Is The Difference Between Aggregation Binding And Element Binding? Ans: Aggregation binding is used for list-like structures, whereas element binding can be used to set the binding context of any parent control. How Is Paging Accomplished In Odata Query? Ans: Paging can be accomplished by using $skip in combination with $top. The parameters’ values describe the interval of the data that is requested. Name Some Odata Query Parameters? Ans: $skip $count $expand What Are Semantic Colors In Sapui5? Ans: They are representations of states such as success, warning, and error. Name Some Semantic States In Sapui5? Ans: Positive Negative Critical How Can You Compose Filters In Sapui5? Ans: By creating multiple filters and concatenating them either with AND or OR By creating a single sap.ui.model.Filter object and specifying a path, an operator, and up to two values Where Are Filters Applied In Sapui5? Ans: To an aggregation binding Which Filter Operation Can You Use To Filter Items With A Numeric Value Lower Than X? Ans: sap.ui.model.FilterOperator.LT What Can You Do To Enable Your Sapui5 Application To Adapt To The User’s Device? Ans: As many controls are responsive out of the box, check whether you have to do anything at all. Set the compact density on devices without touch support. What Can A “device Model” Be Used For? Ans: To check whether a device supports touch interaction To influence the user interface without coding, based on the characteristics of the device What Information Is Provided By The Sap.ui.device Api? Ans: The device type (phone/tablet) Whether the device has touch support The browser name and version Which Control Adapts Its Appearance On Touch Devices? Ans: The PullToRefresh control: It is represented as a simple button on non-touch devices, but the user needs to pull the page content down on touch devices to refresh it. Why Is It Useful To Have Fragments In Your App? Ans: To create reusable UI parts without a designated controller or other behavior code What Happens In The Dom Tree When Nesting Xml Views? Ans: Each XML view creates its own DOM element regardless of the nesting level. What Can You Do To Structure Your Application Code Better? Ans: Use subdirectories for related views and controllers. Use fragments to define reused UI parts only once. Put the functionality used in multiple controllers into a base controller and extend this controller in the other controllers in your app. What Are Fragments Primarily Used For? Ans: To make parts of your view reusable What Are Dialogs In Sapui5? Ans: They are rendered into a specific area (the static area) in the DOM. They needo be added to the “dependent” aggregation of the view to get access to the models. What Happens When You Instantiate A Dialog From A Single-rooted Fragment? Ans: The dialog instance is returned when you invoke the fragment factory. The dialog is instantiated but not displayed. Which Property Of The Routing Configuration In The Manifest.json File Should You Use To Automatically Display A Target That Is Not Found? Ans: Bypassed How Many Targets Can You Configure Within A Route In The Manifest.json File? Ans: As many as you like What Is The Correct Sequence Of Called Functions / Handled Callbacks Of The Odata Model In The Add Controller? Ans: on metadataLoaded - createEntry - submit - on success What Is The Recommended Place To Configure A "twoway" Binding For The Odata Model So That Data Changes In The View Are Written Back To The Model? Ans: In the "models" section of the manifest.json file How Are Unit Tests For Your App Started In Sap Web Ide? Ans: By selecting the run configuration Run Unit Tests By right-clicking the unitTests.qunit.html file and selecting an option from the Run menu How Do You Register A Unit Test In Qunit? Ans: Call QUnit.test() in your test code with a speaking test description and a callback that contains at least one assertion. Which Testing Features Are Provided By The Sap Fiori Worklist Application Template? Ans: A test suite that calls all your unit and integration tests Clear separation of test and production code Unit test setup (QUnit) and basic test coverage Which Options Are Available In Sapui5 If You Want To Create A Custom Control? Ans: Extend an existing control with your own features. Create a composite control that reuses existing controls internally. Extend the sap.ui.core.Control base class and build a new control. Which Of The Following Are Part Of The Control Metadata? Ans: Aggregations Properties Events What Do You Have To Consider When Defining Control Metadata? Ans: You can give an aggregation either one or many values by defining the multiplicity as “one” or “many”. You can make an aggregation invisible in the control API by setting the visibility to hidden. How Do You Enable The Debugging Option For Sap Netweaver Odata Services? Ans: Use the URL parameter sap-ds-debug=true. What Do You Have To Consider When Choosing The Sapui5 Version For The Application Template? Ans: The SAPUI5 version must be available in your target deployment system. What Is Openui5? Ans: A subset of SAPUI5 containing the complete core and more than 200 UI controls A free-to-use and open source UI library ready for your contributions What Is The Correct Syntax For Defining Namespaces In Xml Views? Ans: xmlns:m="sap.m" Why Is Not All Javascript Code Put In A Tag Directly On The Index.html Page? Ans: To clearly separate concerns according to the MVC concept. To make your code much easier to read and maintain To enable your code to dynamically load resources as they are needed What Is A Component Within Sapui5? Ans: An independent and reusable part that can be used to structure SAPUI5 applications What Information Can Be Stored Inside The Manifest.json File Of Your App? Ans: Content densities Root view Models of your app What Is The Benefit Of Data Binding Within Sapui5? Ans: SAPUI5 uses data binding to bind two data sources or information sources together to keep them in sync. This means: All changes in one source are also reflected in the other one. How Can You Add A Margin All Around A Control? Ans: class="sapUiSmallMargin" Which Base Class Are You Recommended To Extend When Implementing A Custom Type? Ans: sap.ui.model.SimpleType How Can You Distinguish Absolute And Relative Binding Paths? Ans: Absolute binding paths always start with a "/". How To Sort And Group Your Sap.m.list When Added To The View.xml? Ans: items="{ path : '/ProductSet', sorter : { path : 'Category', group : true } }" How Can You Access The List Item Control In An Event Handler For The Press Event? Ans: Call the getSource() method at the event object parameter. What Is The Role Of The Application Template In The Development Process? Ans: To generate an initial set of files that serve as the starting point for the development of a productive application How Can Sap.m.table Behave On Smaller Devices Such As Phones And Tablets? Ans: It hides less important columns. It displays less important columns as a "pop-in"; it stacks them vertically inside the row making the table larger in height. Which Filter Operation Is Appropriate For A Textual Search In Sapui5? Ans: sap.ui.model.FilterOperator.Contains Which Responsiveness Features Can You Realize By Setting Standard Css Classes Provided By Sapui5? Ans: Adding different margins to controls depending on the screen size Hiding controls depending on the screen size Which Options For Code Reuse Are Available In Sapui5? Ans: Controller inheritance Nested views Fragments When Should You Put Code From Your View Into A Separate View Or Fragment And Nest It Into The Original View? Ans: When you realize that you need to reuse this code in several other places and views in your app. What Do You Have To Do To Grant A Dialog Access To The Surrounding View’s Models? Ans: Add the dialog to an aggregation of the view, for example the "dependent" aggregation. What Is The Purpose Of The "static Area" In The Dom? Ans: To display dialogs and popup controls over the application UI Which Benefits Does The Hash-based Navigation In Sapui5 Offer? Ans: Hash-based navigation adjusts the current hash to your interactions with the app, so that the URL can always be bookmarked. It allows you to build one-page apps where the contextual navigation is done by changing the hash, so the browser does not have to reload the page. What Do You Have To Do To Be Notified When The Hash Has Changed To A Certain Pattern? Ans: Register to the patternMatched event of the route. What Is Sinon.js? Ans: A standalone unit testing library for JavaScript that provides spies, stubs, and mocks Where Does Opa Fit In The Testing Pyramid? Ans: In component/integration tests Why Is Automated Testing Beneficial For App Development? Ans: It significantly reduces the manual testing effort. It is easier to hand over the app to other developers. You can avoid regressions and bugs in your code. What Is The Main Difference Between Html5 And Sap Ui5? Ans: HTML5 is a markup language and it doesn’t have programming capabilities but SAP UI5 is a framework which is based on MVC approach to build web applications. HTML5 is mainly for the purpose of creating a simple webpage without formatting and logic but UI5 provides standard style and components to build rich UIs. What Is Mvc? Ans: MVC stands for model view controller; it’s an architecture to design UI based applications to achieve maximum reusability and extensibility of the application for future changes. Model is the representation of data in form of object, View defines the UI and Controller contains all the logic to drive as well connects view with model. Why Sapui5 Instead Of Html5? Ans: As HTML5 world is the new age front technology across all aspect of internet applications SAP was kind of trailing in this age because SAP was using age old WebDynpro for building SAP Web Applications which lacks in rich and user-friendly UI. SAP identified this and came up with its own custom HTML5 library i.e. SAPUI5. Write A Review

SAP WM Interview Questions

Q.What is Transfer Requirement ? Answer: An instruction to move materials from a source storage bin to a destination storage bin in a warehouse complex at a specified time. Q.What is Transfer Order? Answer: A request to transfer of materials at a particular time from source storage bin to Destination storage bin in same warehouse complex. Q.On what basis a TO will get generated ? Answer: On Movement Types Q.Which one will the system generates first, TR or TO ? Answer: First TR then TO. Q.At What level the release strategies gets defined ? Answer: Configured at Company code level. Q.What are different Movement Types Answer: 101 – GR Receipts 102 – GR PO reverse 601 – GI delivery 602 – Cancel GI delivery 651 – Sales return 909 – GR Amendment Excess Q.Different stock types and storage types in WM ? Answer: Stock Types – Unrestricted, Blocked, Quality Storage Types – Rack, Open, Shelf, Damage Q.Interim Storage types ? Answer: Goods Receipt area, Goods Issue area, Posting change, Difference. Q.Where you do the stock comparison between IM and WM ? Answer: T-code LX23 Q.Storage location is IM or WM component ? Answer: IM Q.Different types of picking and put away strategies, why? Justify. Answer: Picking FIFO – To sale the oldest material first LIFO – To sale the latest material first Put away: Next empty bin, addition to the existing stock, mixed storage, fixed storage, open storage. Q.Difference between Storage units and Handling units Answer: Storage unit is a container in which a material stored or transported where as Handling unit the combination of material and Packaging material. Q.Why one should create a Second TO in WM. Answer: Second TO has to be created at delivery level to move the stock from intermediate storage type to Goods issue (delivery) area for loading the stock into vehicle. Q.Can you configure the automatic TO creation at all document level ? Answer: Yes. Q.Where do you configure the strategies for Put away and Picking ? Answer: SPRO-> Logistics Execution-> Warehouse Management -> Strategies -> Define Put away Strategies and Logistics Execution-> Warehouse Management -> Strategies -> Define Stock Removal Strategies Q.Explain Warehouse Structure Answer: Warehouse structure contains a Warehouse number, Storage types, Storage sections, storage bins and finally quant. Q.Can a single warehouse could be configured for more than one company code? Answer: Yes it can be. Q.Tell me the different picking and put away strategies defined for xyz Client for different storage types. Answer: For Rack, Open and shelf storage types the picking strategy is FIFO. Put way strategy for Rack, Open, Shelf, CRD and Fixed Bin is Next empty bin, Open storage, open storage, open storage and fixed bin respectively. Q.Can you tell me what all documents get created during GR entry in WM Process. Answer: PO, Inbound Delivery, Transfer Requirement, Shipment and TO. Q.Where is control to confirm TO for Put away and Picking ? Answer: Control to confirm TO for Put away and Picking can be configured at Warehouse, Storage types and Movement types levels. Q.Stock Uploading will happen at which Module MM or WM at rollout in xyz client Answer: First in IM(MM) then in WM Q.Is Storage unit activation mandatory ? Answer: Its not mandatory Q.What is the importance of Quant number ? Answer: when ever u do the GR system will generates one Quant number based on the combination of Material, Batch, and Bin. contact for more on SAP WM Online Training

Drop a Query

SAP BODS Online Training

Self-Paced

Online

Corporate

I recommend KITS as the best place to get practical knowledge of SAP BODS and become a master in SAP BODS

- Ramesh

The trainer was very punctual in completing the course as per schedule. Thanks to the entire team

- Surya

I would like to thank my trainer for enhancing my knowledge on SAP BODS with practical use-cases.

- Ajay

Best place to acquire the best knowledge on SAP BODS from ground to the advanced level

- RITU KUMAR

When I took the SAP BODS training, I was very confident in various modules of BODS. I Would like to thank KITS to enhance my knowledge of BODS.

- ANKIT